JP2017195975A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of further enhancing presentation properties by a movable accessory.SOLUTION: A pachinko game machine includes a lower movable presentation member 101B. The lower movable presentation member 101B includes: a movable body 106 capable of being moved upwardly and downwardly relative to a game board 1 by the rotation of a motor 110A; a movable body 107 including a pressing portion 107C, movably provided at the movable body 106, and movable in a vertical direction together with the movable body 106; a movable body 108 movable in a vertical direction together with the movable body 107; an arm member 112 including a guide hole 112A, provided at the movable body 106 in a swingable manner, and capable of being pressed by the pressing portion 107C; a rotation body 114 including an engaging projection 114A to be engaged with the arm member 112 and a plurality of slits 114B, and rotatably provided at the movable body 108; and a slider member 115 and an outer ring member 117 which include an engaging projection 115A to be engaged with the slit 114B and which are movable in a radial direction and circumferential direction of the rotation body 114 by the rotation of the rotation body 114.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A so-called pachinko gaming machine is known as a gaming machine that uses a game ball to play a game. In this pachinko gaming machine, there is known a pachinko gaming machine provided with a movable accessory movable between a liquid crystal display area and a liquid crystal display area outside a display area for displaying an image (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2010-21040 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the movable accessory only moves between the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area, and the movable accessory does not move at the standby position. Thereby, the production effect by a movable accessory cannot be improved further.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can further enhance the performance by a movable accessory.

  In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be moved to a standby position and a movable position so as to perform a predetermined movable effect (lower movable effect member 101B). The movable accessory is a first movable body (movable body 106) that can move in one direction and the other direction by rotation of a driving member (motor 110A), and a pressing portion (107C). And a second movable body (movable body 107) movable in the one direction and the other direction together with the first movable body, and the first movable body. The second movable body has a third movable body (movable body 108) movable in the other direction and a guide hole (112A) and is swingably provided in the first movable body. Pressable interlocking part (arm member 112 And a rotating member (rotating body 114) that has a first fitting portion (fitting protrusion 114A) and a plurality of slits (114B) that fit into the interlocking portion and that is rotatably provided on the third movable body. ) And a second fitting portion (fitting protrusion 115A) that fits into the plurality of slits, and is movable at least in the radial direction of the rotating member (slider member 115) by the rotation of the rotating member. And a movable member (109) having an outer ring member 117), and in a state where the movable accessory is located at the standby position, by rotating the drive member forward from an initial position, the first movable body and The second movable body is moved in the one direction so that the swinging of the interlocking portion is converted into one direction of rotation of the rotating member, and at least the movable portion is radiated while only allowing the rotation of the rotating member. The first movable body is moved in the other direction by rotating the driving member in the reverse direction from the initial position, and the swinging of the interlocking portion is converted into the rotation of the rotating member in the one direction. On the other hand, the third movable body is moved in the other direction to move the movable accessory to the movable position, and the movable portion is moved at least in the radial direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, two different effects, such as an effect of moving the movable accessory at the standby position and an effect of moving while moving from the standby position to the movable position, can be performed with the rotation direction of a single drive member. It can be easily performed only by switching, and the performance by the movable accessory can be further enhanced.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can improve the performance by a movable accessory further can be provided.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a game board in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a game board in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable body and movable member of the lower side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concern on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the movable body and movable member of the lower side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concern on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear side. It is a schematic rear view of the movable body when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a schematic rear view of a movable body when a movable part expands in the standby position of the lower movable production member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic rear view of the movable body when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the movable position. It is a schematic rear view of the movable member when the lower movable effect member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the movable position. It is a schematic rear view of a movable member when a movable part expands in the standby position of the lower movable production member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic rear view of a movable member when a movable part expands in the movable position in the lower movable production | presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the lower side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention expands in a standby position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the lower movable production member in the gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention expands in a movable position. It is a front view of a prize opening unit and a lower movable production member in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of a winning opening unit in the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the prize opening unit in the gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the periphery of the rear cover and lower side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is a front view of the lower movable production | presentation member expanded in the winning opening unit and standby position in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the lower movable production | presentation member from which the structure of a winning opening unit and a movable part in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification) of this invention differs. It is a front view of the state where the lower movable production member in which the composition of a prize opening unit and a movable part in a game machine concerning one embodiment (modification) of the present invention is expanded in the standby position. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable production member in the gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the upper movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the case of the upper side movable production member in the gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention, the fixed base, and the rear side movable base from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the case of the upper side movable production | presentation member, fixed base, and rear side movable base in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side movable base, blade movable rack, and decoration member of the upper side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the front side movable base, blade | wing movable rack, and decoration member of the upper side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the right rear. It is a schematic front view of the rear movable base and the front movable base when the upper movable production member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a schematic front view of the rear side movable base and front side movable base when the upper side movable production | presentation member in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention exists in a movable position. It is a schematic front view of the front movable base and the blade movable rack when the upper movable production member in the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention is in the standby position. It is a schematic front view of the front side movable base and blade movable rack when the upper side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention exists in a movable position. It is a schematic front view of the electrical decoration board | substrate in case the upper side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention exists in a standby position. It is a schematic front view of the electrical decoration board | substrate when the upper side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention exists in a movable position. It is XL-XL direction arrow directional cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along arrow XLI-XLI in FIG. 36. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view of the rear movable base, the front movable base, and the blade movable rack in a state where the upper movable production member has moved from the state of FIG. 41 to the movable position. It is XLIII-XLIII direction arrow directional cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the rear movable base, the front movable base, and the blade movable rack in a state where the upper movable production member has moved from the state of FIG. 43 to the movable position. It is a figure which shows the state of the flexible cable accommodated in the rear side movable base in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in a standby position, a front side movable base, a front side movable base, and a blade movable rack. It is a figure which shows the state of the flexible cable accommodated in the rear side movable base in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention in a movable position, a front side movable base, a front side movable base, and a blade movable rack. It is explanatory drawing which showed the state which the upper side movable production | presentation member in the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention moves from a standby position to a movable position in order of (a)-(c). It is a front view of the game board showing the state where the upper movable effect member in the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention has moved to the movable position. It is a transition diagram showing the gaming state and effect mode of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation | movement pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and interval time between rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a part of sub effect content determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a part of sub effect content determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change time management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening open process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ST mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the story effect pattern change process during ST of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item prefetch effect process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item use effect process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate A use effect process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate B use effect process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the plate C use effect process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item acquisition effect process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the winning effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start effect process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the live bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the live bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display at the normal time of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the music pattern A of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the music pattern A of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story area of ST mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story area of ST mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the effect pattern per related story for SP bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the item prefetch effect of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the item prefetch effect of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the item prefetch effect of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit production pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification) of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram which shows the story production | presentation table group of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification) of this invention. It is a figure which shows the main change time determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment (modification) of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation | movement pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a lineblock diagram of the left movable production member and the right movable production member of a gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board showing the state where the left movable effect member and the right movable effect member in the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention have moved to the movable position. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball path unit in the game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention from the right front. It is a front view of the ball passage unit in the game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention. It is a CXXVI-CXXVI direction arrow directional cross-sectional view of FIG. It is a CXXVII-CXXVII direction arrow directional cross-sectional view of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is detachably provided with a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball as a game medium can roll down. The main body frame 2 provided with the main body frame base plate 2a (also referred to as the main body frame base) and the front frame base plate 3a (hereinafter referred to as the front frame opening portion) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board 1 can be viewed. A table frame 3), and a front frame 3 that is rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display ( 3 is provided with a rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably provided, and a rear frame (not shown) supported rotatably by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). Abbreviation).

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame is Since it is accommodated in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The table frame 3 has a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame components provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include protective glass 7, dish unit 8, operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained. In addition, in the dish unit 8, respective cover members (an upper dish upper cover 8a, a lower dish cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In the state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the front surface (front surface) side. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on the upper side of the front frame 3 on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

  A decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp which will be described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, and a right panel cover 15c) that can be changed and a left decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a) are provided.

  Inside the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp / LED 27) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 and is sensed from the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 as, for example, radiated light, diffused light, or the like with excellent aesthetics. Thereby, since the change in the display mode by light can be given, the interest with respect to a game can be improved.

  Further, a plate unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 provided on the lower side of the upper tray 17 and capable of storing game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full, for example. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p that can store a game ball, an upper plate upper cover 8a that is detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, An upper plate decoration member for improving the beauty of the upper plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

  The front frame base plate 3a has a discharge outlet 20 for paying out game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the rear side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball path of a game ball paid out from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), or a ball path cover (illustrated) that connects the discharge port and the supply port 21 to form a ball path. Abbreviation) is provided. When a game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the game ball stays near the payout port 20 while the game ball is paid out. When the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are transferred from the discharge port to the lower plate via the ball passage and the supply port 21. 18 is sent.

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used for decoration on the front surface of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front portion of the upper plate 17. By using this plated member 17b, the decoration effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

  The upper plate upper cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for lending a ball, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects as a player operates (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. In addition, although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the arrangement configuration (position, direction) of the operation unit 9, in the drawing, as an example, the pressing operation button 9A protrudes from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 configured to be provided with a jog dial 9B is shown.

  In addition, about the front frame 3, in the surface (front side), the part in the left side (namely, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) toward the player side, for example, fraud such as a piano wire It is possible to envisage a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act by the unauthorized member is performed on various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the part.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an unauthorized act, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back side of the front frame 3 at a portion where the invading act by the unauthorized member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion that holds wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion that covers a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an unauthorized member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering portion, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to prepare a member for each of these functions separately. Therefore, the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided on the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituting member includes a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

  The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. And a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

  A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the above-described dish unit 8. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

  The firing handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle grip 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can be rotated in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction, and in the support portion. A launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the sphere, a launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning on / off the launch stop switch, and an opening on the handle grip 26d are provided. And a handle cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased or decreased according to the rotation amount (rotation angle), and is stored in the upper plate 17 by the driving force at that time. The game balls that have been played are launched toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIG. 3). At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the launch driving device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by a payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, there is provided a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times. The game ball is fired by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

  When the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by a protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed in accordance with the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b, and the launching solenoid (not shown) It is known to change the firing strength of the game ball by changing the power supplied to the abbreviation). However, the launching device 26 according to the present embodiment is configured to rotate the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b. A launching spring (not shown) that interlocks with the launching spring and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (clamping) the launching spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the turning amount of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the turning amount of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b to increase or weaken the degree of winding (clamping) of the launching spring. Increases or decreases the firing strength.

  The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the part of the dish unit 8 in the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper dish 17 and the lower dish 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and a rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) is provided behind the game board 1. Yes. The game board 1 has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can roll down. The game board 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material such as a plywood board.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first start port 32, a second start port 33, a blade member 34 that opens and closes the second start port 33, a passing gate 35, The first grand prize opening 36, the second big prize opening 37, the first big prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first big prize opening 36, the second big prize opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second big prize opening 37, the second A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B positioned below the big prize opening 37, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, an out opening 41, an upper movable production member 101A, a lower movable effect member 101B, a cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first start port 32, the second start port 33, the passing gate 35, the first large winning port 36, the second large winning port 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning port 40A. , 40B, 40C, 40D form a winning area. FIG. 4 shows a state where the cover member 43 is removed.

  On the surface of the game board 1, there are a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first start port 32, a second start port 33, a second start port 33, a passage gate 35, general winning ports 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, and an out port 41. Is provided. In addition to the out port 41 provided below the game board 1, an out port is provided in the game area 1p in the vicinity of the first big prize port shutter 36A, the second big prize port shutter 37A, or the first start port 32. May be.

  The lower movable effect member 101B is provided at the rear of the game board 1 and is visible by the player from the front. An opening 1B (see FIG. 22) is formed in the game board 1. The upper movable effect member 101A is disposed between the game board 1 and the rear cover 1A (see FIG. 23) in the upper part of the game board 1, and the front of the upper movable effect member 101A is covered with a decorative member 99. Yes.

  That is, the upper movable effect member 101 </ b> A is disposed behind the decorative member 99. The decorative member 99 is composed of a member that can transmit light. The decorative member 99 may be formed with letters such as alphabets, numbers, kanji, hiragana, katakana, and symbols, and a picture that forms the character. It may be formed. The decorative member 99 of the present embodiment constitutes the decorative member of the present invention.

  An opening (not shown) is formed on the lower right side of the game board 1, and the first big prize opening shutter 36A, the second big prize opening 37, the second big prize opening shutter 37A, and the specific area 38A are formed in the opening. A prize opening unit in which the non-specific region 38B and the displacement member 39 are unitized is attached.

  The guide rail 30 includes an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail 30A, and is arranged on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail 30A. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The stage 31 distributes the flow area of the game ball in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball launched by the launching device 26 is directed downward to the game board 1 while changing its advancing direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or a stage 31 or the like driven into the game area 1p of the game board 1. Flow down. In this process, the game ball wins one of the first start port 32, the second start port 33, the first grand prize port 36, the second big prize port 37, and the general prize ports 40A, 40B, 40C, and 40D. In addition, when the player does not win a prize or when the player passes through the passage gate 35 and does not win a prize, the player collects the item by being discharged from the outlet 41.

  Note that winning means that the game ball passes the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, thereby giving a situation advantageous to the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33 described later, symbol lottery, winning ball, etc.) It means to do. At this time, passing through the winning area by the game ball means simply passing, and entering the winning area by the game ball means collecting the game ball separately from the out port 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, the passing and the entering are substantially synonymous. Accordingly, both the passing of game balls and winning balls in the winning area lead to winning, and therefore, in the following description, “winning” is unified unless otherwise specified. The passing of the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as “V winning”.

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively small, since the launch force applied to the game ball is generally small, the game ball flows down mainly on the left side of the stage 31. In addition, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball flows down mainly on the right side of the stage 31. In general, the method of hitting the game ball to the left of the stage 31 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball to the right of the stage 31 is called “right-handed”.

  The first start port 32 and the second start port 33 provide an opportunity for a lottery on condition that a game ball wins, and an opportunity to display the result of the lottery on the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. To give. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 realize a first start region and a second start region.

  The first start port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins the first start port 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 32 is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided directly below the passage gate 35. When a game ball wins the second start port 33, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The second start port 33 is determined to be difficult to win by a blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 33 is detected by the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to project and retract in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and has an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second start port 33 and a second start This is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to win a game ball in the mouth 33. The blade member 34 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  Note that the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to one that opens and closes the blade member 34 in the front-rear direction, but for example, a so-called electric tulip type that widens the starting port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1. Or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the start port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of a game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by a passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened in the hit gaming state (big hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The first grand prize winning port 36 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting port 32 and immediately below the passing gate 35. The second grand prize winning port 37 is provided substantially on the right side of the first starting port 32 and immediately below the first big winning prize port 36. Note that the positions at which the first grand prize winning port 36 and the second grand prize winning port 37 are arranged are not limited to the positions described above, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  The first big winning opening 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large lateral dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win simultaneously. In the vicinity of the first big prize opening 36, a first big prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the same is provided. The winning of a game ball in the first big prize opening 36 is detected by a first big prize opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

  The second large winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that game balls can be won one by one. In the vicinity of the second big prize opening 37, a second big prize opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the same is provided. The winning of a game ball in the second big prize opening 37 is detected by a second big prize opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

  The first grand prize opening shutter 36A switches the first big prize opening 36 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing so as to have a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1. It arrange | positions so that the 1st big winning opening 36 may be covered in a closed state. That is, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A is first changed so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 36 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by a special prize opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

  The second big prize opening shutter 37A horizontally moves in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 to switch the second big prize opening 37 to an open state or a closed state. In the closed state, the second big prize opening 37 is opened. It is arranged to cover. That is, the second grand prize opening shutter 37A is changed so that it changes between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second big prize opening 37 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. It is driven by a big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  The specific area 38 </ b> A and the non-specific area 38 </ b> B are areas through which a game ball that has won the second big prize opening 37 can subsequently pass and is covered with the cover member 43. The ball path of the game ball from the second big prize opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game balls that have won the second grand prize opening 37 pass through one of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B, and then are guided to the back surface of the game board 1 and collected. A second grand prize port count switch 370 is disposed in the middle of the ball path from the second grand prize port 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided near the specific region 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to an open state or a closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. In other words, the displacement member 39 changes between an open state (first state) in which V winning of a game ball to the specific area 38A is easy and a closed state (second state) in which V winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by a displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball in which the V winning is impossible passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first grand prize port 36, the first grand prize port shutter 36A, the first grand prize port shutter solenoid 360A, and the first grand prize port count switch 360 are the first variable prize device. Realized. The second big prize opening 37, the second big prize opening shutter 37A, the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second big prize opening count switch 370 realize a second variable prize winning device.

  The general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C are provided on the left side with respect to the first large winning opening 36, and the general winning opening 40D is provided on the upper right side of the second large winning opening 37. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, although a lottery is not performed, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B.

<Configuration and operation of lower movable effect member 101B>
FIGS. 7 to 19 are views showing the lower movable effect member 101B and the game board 1 in a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is moved. In FIGS. This is the up / down / left / right direction of the lower movable effect member 101B as seen. The lower movable effect member 101B of the present embodiment constitutes the movable accessory of the present invention.

  7, 8, and 9, the lower movable production member 101 </ b> B includes fixed bodies 104 and 105, movable bodies 106, 107, and 108 and a movable member 109.

  The fixed body 104 is fixed to the rear cover 1 </ b> A (see FIG. 23) behind the game board 1. In FIG. 8, the fixed body 104 is provided with shaft portions 104A to 104D, and gears 113A to 113D are rotatably supported by the shaft portions 104A to 104D, respectively.

  8 and 9, a motor mounting plate 110 is mounted on the front surface of the fixed body 104, and the gears 113 </ b> A to 113 </ b> D are accommodated between the motor mounting plate 110 and the fixed body 104.

  A motor 110 </ b> A is fixed to the motor mounting plate 110. A gear 113A is attached to a rotating shaft (not shown) of the motor 110A. The gear 113D is formed with a larger diameter than the gears 113A to 113C, and the rotation of the motor 110A is decelerated by being transmitted from the gear 113A to the large diameter gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C.

  The fixed body 105 is fixed to the fixed body 104, and the movable bodies 106 and 107 are accommodated between the fixed body 104 and the fixed body 105, and are provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105. It has been.

  Rack teeth 106A extending in the vertical direction are formed on the side surface of the movable body 106, and the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D. Thereby, when the motor 110A is driven, the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 by the gear 113D.

  The movable body 106 is formed with a pair of guide holes 106B and 106C extending in the vertical direction. Guide protrusions 104E and 104F provided on the fixed body 104 are slidably fitted into the guide holes 106B and 106C, respectively. Match.

  A long guide hole 104G extending in the vertical direction is formed in the fixed body 104, and a guide projection 106E provided on the back surface of the movable body 106 is slidably fitted in the guide hole 104G. .

  Accordingly, when the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed body 104, the movable body 106 moves along the guide protrusions 104 </ b> E and 104 </ b> F and the guide hole 104 </ b> G and does not swing in the horizontal direction with respect to the fixed body 104. .

  A guide hole 107A extending in the vertical direction is formed in the movable body 107, and a guide projection 106F provided in the movable body 106 is slidably fitted in the guide hole 107A. Accordingly, the movable body 107 is supported by the guide protrusion 106F and moves in the vertical direction with respect to the movable body 106, and does not swing in the left-right direction with respect to the movable body 106.

  Rack teeth 107 </ b> B having uneven portions extending in the vertical direction are formed on the side surface of the movable body 107, and the rack teeth 107 </ b> B mesh with the gear 111.

  The fixed body 105 is formed with rack teeth 105 </ b> A that are opposed to the game board 1 in the left-right direction and have uneven portions extending in the up-down direction, and the rack teeth 105 </ b> A mesh with the gear 111. The gear 111 is rotatably attached to a shaft portion 106 </ b> G provided on the movable body 106. Accordingly, when the movable body 106 moves in the vertical direction, the gear 111 that moves up and down integrally with the movable body 106 rotates, so that the movable body 107 moves up and down integrally with the movable body 106.

  The movable body 106 is provided with a shaft portion 106H, and an arm member 112 is swingably attached to the shaft portion 106H. A pressing portion 107C extending in the direction (left-right direction) orthogonal to the extending direction (vertical direction) of the movable body 107 is provided on the upper portion of the movable body 107, and the pressing portion 107C is located above the arm member 112. positioned.

  When the movable body 107 moves downward, the arm member 112 swings downward by the pressing portion 107C with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum.

  A pair of guide holes 108A and 108B extending in the vertical direction are formed at both ends of the movable body 108, and guide protrusions 105B and 105C provided at both ends of the fixed body 105 slide in the guide holes 108A and 108B. Fits freely. Thereby, the movable body 108 is supported by the guide protrusions 105 </ b> B and 105 </ b> C and moves in the vertical direction relative to the fixed body 105, and does not swing in the horizontal direction with respect to the fixed body 105.

  A guide groove 108 </ b> C extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface of the movable body 108. A guide protrusion 107D is formed on the upper end of the movable body 107, and the guide protrusion 107D is slidably fitted in the guide groove 108C.

  Accordingly, when the movable body 107 moves upward, the guide protrusion 107D of the movable body 107 moves upward along the guide groove 108C, and the movable body 108 moves upward by contacting the upper end of the inner periphery of the guide groove 108C. To do.

  A curved hole 108D is formed in the movable body 108. The curved hole 108D extends in the circumferential direction of the movable body 108 with a predetermined length. The movable member 109 is attached to the movable body 108 and can move in the vertical direction together with the movable body 108.

  10 and 11, the movable member 109 includes a rotating body 114, a plurality of slider members 115, a circular member 116, and a plurality of outer ring members 117.

  The rotating body 114 is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 116 i provided on the circular member 116, and the shaft portion 116 i is fixed to the movable body 108. A fitting protrusion 114 </ b> A is provided on the back surface of the rotating body 114. The fitting protrusion 114A is slidably fitted into the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 and the guide hole 112A (see FIG. 8) of the arm member 112.

  When the arm member 112 swings about the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum, the rotating body 114 moves relative to the movable body 108 with the shaft portion 116i as a fulcrum by sliding the fitting protrusion 114A along the curved hole 108D. And can be rotated.

  The rotating body 114 has a plurality of slits 114B. In FIG. 15, the slit 114 </ b> B is linearly bent from the first straight line portion 114 n extending linearly in the radial direction of the rotating body 114 and from the first straight line portion 114 n outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114. And a second straight portion 114w extending in the shape of a circle.

  In FIGS. 10 and 11, a fitting projection 115 </ b> A is formed on the back surface of the slider member 115. The fitting protrusion 115A is slidably fitted into the slit 114B of the rotating body 114.

  The circular member 116 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 116 </ b> A that protrude toward the movable body 108. The protrusion 116A is engaged with an engagement hole 108F formed in the circumferential direction of the movable body 108 by screws or the like (not shown). Thereby, the circular member 116 is fixed to the movable body 108 and does not rotate relative to the movable body 108. Engagement in the present embodiment can include engagement or fixation of an object by screws, screws, etc. (component members, fixing parts, engaging parts, etc.). It can also be expressed as Moreover, the slit of this embodiment includes a notch, a groove, a long hole, and the like.

  A plurality of fitting grooves 116 </ b> B are formed in the circular member 116. In FIG. 15, the fitting groove 116 </ b> B is bent from the first straight portion 116 n extending linearly in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and from the first straight portion 116 n in the radial direction outward of the circular member 116. And a second straight portion 116w extending linearly.

  10 and 11, a plurality of fitting protrusions 115B are formed on the surface of the slider member 115, and the fitting protrusions 115B are slidably fitted in the fitting grooves 116B.

  The outer ring member 117 is divided and provided in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116. The outer ring members 117 are respectively attached to the outer peripheral portion of the slider member 115 in the radial direction, and are provided around the outer peripheral portion of the circular member 116 so as to contact the outer peripheral surface of the circular member 116 in the radial direction.

  In the slider member 115, the fitting protrusion 115 </ b> A is fitted in the slit 114 </ b> B of the rotating body 114, and the fitting protrusion 115 </ b> B is fitted in the fitting groove 116 </ b> B of the circular member 116. Thus, when the rotating body 114 rotates in one direction, the slider member 115 moves radially outward of the rotating body 114 along the slit 114B and the fitting groove 116B, and then swings in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114. Move. Therefore, after the outer ring member 117 is moved outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 114, the outer ring member 117 is moved in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 so as to form a gap in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114.

  A torsion spring 118 is wound around the shaft portion 116 i of the circular member 116. The torsion spring 118 has one end attached to the movable body 108 and the other end attached to the rotating body 114, and biases the rotating body 114 to the standby position.

  8 and 9, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are connected by a coil spring 119. Specifically, in FIG. 9, an engagement portion 105D is provided on the back surface of the fixed body 105, and one end portion of a coil spring 119 is attached to the engagement portion 105D. An engaging portion 106I is provided at the lower portion of the side surface of the movable body 106, and the other end portion of the coil spring 119 is attached to the engaging portion 106I.

  The coil spring 119 is arranged so that the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are relatively contracted, that is, the vertical distance between the engaging portion 105D and the engaging portion 106I is shortened. Is energized. In other words, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are urged by the coil spring 119 so that the vertical distance between the engaging portion 105D and the engaging portion 106I is shortened.

  The movable body 106 and the fixed body 104 are connected by a coil spring 120. Specifically, an engaging portion 106J is provided below the movable body 106, and one end portion of a coil spring 120 is attached to the engaging portion 106J. An engaging portion 104H is provided on the upper portion of the fixed body 104, and the other end portion of the coil spring 120 is attached to the engaging portion 104H.

  The coil spring 120 is arranged so that the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 are relatively contracted, that is, the vertical distance between the engaging portion 104H and the engaging portion 106J is shortened. Is energized. In other words, the fixed body 104 and the movable body 106 are urged by the coil spring 120 so that the vertical distance between the engaging portion 104H and the engaging portion 106J is shortened. The relative extension means that when one part and the other part move relatively, a specific part of one part and a specific part of the other part (for example, the lower end of one part and the other part The distance from the lower end is increased, and the relative contraction means that when one part and the other part move relatively, a specific part of one part and a specific part of the other part ( For example, the distance between the lower end of one component and the lower end of the other component is shortened. 8 and 9 show a state in which the coil springs 119 and 120 are contracted to the maximum.

  In FIG. 8, the lower movable effect member 101 </ b> B includes a flexible cable 130. The other end of the flexible cable 130 is connected to a lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6).

  The flexible cable 130 extends from the other end to the movable member 109 through a slit 108E (see FIG. 9) formed in the movable body 108. The movable member 109 incorporates an electrical decoration board (not shown) having an LED (not shown), and the flexible cable 130 turns on the LED by transmitting a control signal from the lamp control circuit 78 to the electrical decoration board.

  The flexible cable 130 is installed by being bent between the fixed body 104, the movable body 106, the fixed body 105, and the movable body 108, and when the movable body 106 and the movable body 108 move relative to the fixed body 105. It is designed to expand and contract. As a result, the flexible cable 130 can smoothly expand and contract while allowing the movable body 106 and the movable body 108 to move relative to the fixed body 105.

  Here, the motor 110A of the present embodiment constitutes a driving member of the present invention, and the movable body 106 constitutes a first movable body of the present invention. The movable body 107 constitutes the second movable body of the present invention, and the movable body 108 constitutes the third movable body of the present invention. The rotating body 114 constitutes a rotating member of the present invention. 114 A of fitting protrusions comprise the 1st fitting part of this invention, and the slit 114B comprises the slit of this invention. 115 A of fitting protrusions comprise the 2nd fitting part of this invention. The movable member 109 constitutes a movable member of the present invention, and the slider member 115 and the outer ring member 117 constitute a movable portion of the present invention. The arm member 112 constitutes an interlocking part of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the lower movable effect member 101B will be described.
The lower movable effect member 101 </ b> B is installed behind the game board 1. A state in which the movable bodies 106 to 108 are not moved upward (in front of the central portion of the display area 4A) with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 is the standby position. That is, the position shown in FIG. 3 is the standby position of the lower movable effect member 101B. 3, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward with respect to the fixed bodies 104 and 105 (see FIG. 13), and the lower movable effect member 101B expands in the radial direction (FIG. 18). The state shown in FIG. 5 is also included in the standby position.

  When the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the movable bodies 106 to 108 are relatively contracted as shown in FIG. 12, and the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114 is formed in the curved hole 108D. It is fitted to the upper end of the inner circumference in the extending direction. The gear 113D meshes downward from the upper part of the rack teeth 106A of the movable body 106.

  When the motor 110A is driven in one direction (forward rotation) from the initial position in a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is located at the standby position, the rotation of the gear 113A causes the gears 113B and 113C to rotate as shown in FIG. The movable body 106 moves downward by the rotation of the gear 113D that is transmitted to the gear 113D and meshes with the rack teeth 106A.

  When the movable body 106 moves downward, the gear 111 provided integrally with the movable body 106 moves downward while rotating. Since the fixed body 105 is fixed to the fixed body 104 fixed to the rear cover 1A and does not move together with the fixed body 104, when the gear 111 rotates, the rotation of the gear 111 is transmitted to the rack teeth 107B, and the movable body 107 moves downward. Move to. That is, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward in one direction with respect to the game board 1.

  When the movable body 107 moves downward, the pressing portion 107C presses the arm member 112 downward, so that the arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. At this time, the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114 that fits into the guide hole 112A of the arm member 112 and the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 moves downward along the curved hole 108D.

  Thereby, the rotating body 114 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 15 (clockwise when viewed from the game board 1 side).

  In a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is positioned at the standby position, the rotating body 114 is biased by the torsion spring 118 and biased to the standby position. In the state where the rotator 114 is biased to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 15, the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 is the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotator 114. Of the two fitting projections 115B, the fitting projection 115B positioned radially inward is engaged with the radial inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. Match.

  When the rotating body 114 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 15, the fitting protrusion 115A moves radially outward from the radially inner end of the first straight portion 114n as shown in FIG. The mating protrusion 115B moves outward in the radial direction from the radial inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 116n.

  As a result, the slider member 115 moves from the radially inward direction of the circular member 116 to the radially outward direction, and the outer ring member 117 moves from the radially inward direction of the circular member 116 to the radially outward direction. It expands in the radial direction (see FIG. 18).

  When the motor 110A is reversely driven to the initial position from this state, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 moves upward along the rack teeth 106A (see FIG. 12). .

  When the movable body 106 moves upward, the gear 111 provided integrally with the movable body 106 moves upward while rotating. Accordingly, the gear 111 moves upward while rotating along the rack teeth 105 </ b> A of the fixed body 105, so that the movable body 107 that meshes with the gear teeth 111 and the rack teeth 107 </ b> B moves upward as the gear 111 rotates. (See FIG. 14).

  When the movable body 107 moves upward, the pressing portion 107C does not press the arm member 112 downward. At this time, the rotating body 114 is rotated in the clockwise direction in FIG. 16 (counterclockwise rotating direction when viewed from the game board 1 side) with respect to the movable body 108 by the biasing force of the torsion spring 118, and the arm member 112 is rotated. It swings upward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum.

  At this time, the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114 that fits into the guide hole 112A of the arm member 112 and the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108 moves upward along the curved hole 108D. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 15, the fitting protrusion 115A moves from the radially outer side of the first straight part 114n to the radially inner peripheral end, and the fitting protrusion 115B becomes the first straight part. It moves from the outer radial direction 116n to the inner peripheral edge in the radial direction. Therefore, the slider member 115 moves inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and the outer ring member 117 moves so as to shrink inward in the radial direction of the circular member 116.

  In this way, the motor 110A is driven to rotate forward from the initial position to move the movable body 107 downward, and then the reverse movement is performed so as to return the movable body 107 to the initial position from the driven position. An effect in which the outer ring member 117 is movable in a state where the outer ring member 117 is positioned radially inward of the rotating body 114 (see FIG. 3) and a state where the outer ring member 117 is positioned radially outward (see FIG. 18). I do. Accordingly, the lower movable effect member 101B can be enlarged and reduced at the standby position.

  On the other hand, when the lower movable effect member 101B performs an effect of moving upward from the standby position, the motor 110A is reversed from the initial position when the movable bodies 106 to 108 are relatively contracted as shown in FIG. Drive to rotation.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 14, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 whose rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D moves upward.

  When the movable body 106 moves upward, the gear 111 provided integrally with the movable body 106 moves upward along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105 while rotating. Along with this, the movable body 107 having the rack teeth 107B meshing with the gear 111 moves upward with a movement amount larger than the movement amount of the movable body 106. That is, the movable bodies 106 and 107 move upward with respect to the game board 1.

  The motor 110A performs forward rotation (one direction) and reverse rotation (the other direction), and the lower movable effect member 101B and the movable bodies 106 and 107 move downward (one direction) and upward (the other direction). It can be expressed as moving, and such an expression can be expressed in one direction when expressing the rotation direction such as forward rotation and reverse rotation, and the movement direction such as downward, upward, left and right. It is possible to use an expression in the other direction.

  When the movable body 107 moves upward, the guide protrusion 107D of the movable body 107 moves upward along the guide groove 108C of the movable body 108, and comes into contact with the inner peripheral upper end of the guide groove 108C. Thereby, the movable body 108 is pressed by the movable body 107 and moves upward. .

  When the movable body 108 moves upward, the fitting protrusion 114A of the rotating body 114 moves downward along the curved hole 108D of the movable body 108, and the arm member 112 swings upward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. Thereby, the rotator 114 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 14 (clockwise when viewed from the game board 1 side).

  In a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the rotating body 114 is biased by the torsion spring 118 and biased to the standby position. In the state where the rotator 114 is biased to the standby position, as shown in FIG. 15, the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 is the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotator 114. Of the plurality of fitting protrusions 115B, the fitting protrusion 115B located radially inward is engaged with the radially inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. Match.

  When the rotator 114 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 15 by the arm member 112, the fitting protrusion 115A moves radially outward from the radially inner end of the first straight portion 114n to be fitted. The protrusion 115B moves radially outward from the radially inner end of the first straight portion 116n.

  As a result, the slider member 115 moves from the radially inner side of the rotating body 114 to the radially outer side, and the outer ring member 117 moves from the radially inner side of the rotating body 114 to the radially outer side.

  When the rotating body 114 further rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 16 as the movable body 107 further rises, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 17, the fitting protrusion 115A moves from the first linear portion 114n. After moving to the second straight portion 114w, the second straight portion 114w moves outward in the radial direction. At the same time, after the fitting protrusion 115B moves from the first straight portion 116n to the second straight portion 116w, it moves outward in the radial direction of the second straight portion 116w.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 17, the slider member 115 swings in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116 in a state where the slider member 115 is moved outward in the radial direction of the circular member 116, and the outer ring member 117 is radiated by the rotating body 114. It moves in the circumferential direction of the rotator 114 from the state of moving outward in the direction. That is, the movable bodies 106 to 108 move the outer ring member 117 radially outward of the rotating body 114 before moving to a state of extending relatively from the standby position, and then move in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 114. Perform a moving effect. In addition, the state (state shown in FIG. 14) in which the movable bodies 106 to 108 are relatively extended corresponds to the movable position of the present invention.

  When the motor 110A is reversely driven so as to return the motor 110A to the initial position from this state, the rotation of the gear 113A is transmitted to the gear 113D via the gears 113B and 113C, and the movable body 106 in which the rack teeth 106A mesh with the gear 113D moves downward. To do.

  When the movable body 106 moves downward, the gear 111 integrally provided in the movable body 106 moves downward while rotating, and the gear 111 rotates downward along the rack teeth 105A of the fixed body 105 while moving downward. Move to. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 14 to 12, the movable body 107 having the rack teeth 107B meshing with the gear 111 moves downward.

  In the present embodiment, the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are connected by a coil spring 119, and the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are biased by the coil spring 119 in a relatively contracting direction. Further, the movable body 106 and the fixed body 104 are connected by a coil spring 120, and the fixed body 105 and the movable body 106 are biased by the coil spring 120 in a relatively contracting direction.

  For this reason, the movable body 106 moves downward at a faster speed than when moving upward from the standby position by the biasing force of the coil springs 119 and 120 in addition to the rotation of the motor 110A.

  When the movable body 106 moves downward, the movable body 107 moves downward together with the movable body 106 with a movement amount larger than the movement amount of the movable body 106. When the movable body 107 moves downward, the guide projection 107D of the movable body 107 moves downward along the guide groove 108C of the movable body 108, and comes into contact with the lower end in the radial direction of the guide groove 108C. Thereby, the movable body 108 is pressed by the movable body 107 and moves downward.

  When the movable body 108 moves downward, the curved hole 108D moves downward along the fitting projection 114A of the rotating body 114, and when the fitting projection 114A comes into contact with the upper end in the radial direction of the curved hole 108D, The arm member 112 swings downward with the shaft portion 106H as a fulcrum. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 16, the rotating body 114 rotates in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the game board 1 side).

  When the rotating body 114 rotates clockwise as shown in FIGS. 17 to 16, the rotating body 114 is biased by the torsion spring 118, and the fitting protrusion 115 </ b> A of the slider member 115 forms the slit 114 </ b> B of the rotating body 114. The second protrusion 114B moves from the second straight portion 114w to the first straight portion 114n, and the fitting protrusion 115B moves from the second straight portion 116w of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116 to the first straight portion 116n. As a result, the slider member 115 moves in the circumferential direction of the circular member 116.

  When the rotating body 114 further rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 16 from this state, the fitting protrusion 115A of the slider member 115 moves to the radial inner peripheral end of the first straight portion 114n of the slit 114B of the rotating body 114. The fitting protrusion 115B moves to the lower end in the radial inner periphery of the first straight portion 116n of the fitting groove 116B of the circular member 116. As a result, the outer ring member 117 is moved radially outward from the radial direction of the circular member 116.

  By driving the motor 110A in the other direction (reverse rotation) from the initial position in this way, the lower movable effect member 101B is moved upward, and the outer ring member 117 is moved radially outward and circumferentially of the rotating body 114. An effect can be performed, and when the lower movable effect member 101B moves to the movable position, an effect such that the lower movable effect member 101B expands can be performed (see FIG. 19).

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower movable effect member 101B includes the movable body 106 that can move upward and downward with respect to the game board 1 by the rotation of the motor 110A, and the pressing portion 107C. And a movable body 107 that is movably provided on the movable body 106 and is movable upward and downward relative to the game board 1 together with the movable body 106, and upward and downward relative to the game board 1 together with the movable body 107. A movable body 108 is provided.

  Further, the lower movable effect member 101B has a guide hole 112A and is swingably provided in the movable body 106. The arm member 112 can be pressed by the pressing portion 107C, and the fitting protrusion 114A that is fitted to the arm member 112. And a rotating body 114 that has a plurality of slits 114B and is rotatably provided on the movable body 108, and a fitting projection 115A that fits into the slit 114B. A slider member 115 movable in the circumferential direction and a movable member 109 having an outer ring member 117 are provided.

  Further, the lower movable effect member 101B moves the movable members 106 and 107 downward by rotating the motor 110A forward from the initial position in a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is positioned at the standby position, thereby swinging the arm member 112. 114, the outer ring member 117 is moved in the radial direction while allowing only the rotation of the rotating body 114, and the motor 110A is rotated backward from the initial position, thereby moving the movable body 106 upward. The movable member 108 is moved upward to move the lower movable effect member 101 </ b> B to the movable position and the outer ring member 117 is rotated while converting the swing of the arm member 112 into one-way rotation of the rotating member 114. The body 114 is moved in the radial direction and the circumferential direction.

  Thereby, two different effects, such as an effect of moving the lower movable effect member 101B at the standby position and an effect of moving while moving from the standby position to the movable position, can be easily performed by simply switching the rotation direction of the single motor 110A. The performance by the lower movable production member 101B can be further enhanced.

<Composition of winning prize>
The configuration of the winning opening will be described with reference to FIGS. The game board 1 includes a winning opening unit 201 shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, and the winning opening unit 201 includes a first start opening member 202. The first start port member 202 is attached to the game board 1 (see FIG. 3), and an opening constituting the first start port 32 is formed at the upper end of the first start port member 202.

  A ball passage 203 is formed inside the first start port member 202 to discharge the game balls won in the first start port 32 downstream. A cylindrical portion 202A (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is formed in the lower portion of the first starting port member 202, and the cylindrical portion 202A extends rearward from the first starting port member 202.

  20 and 21, a spherical passage 204 is formed inside the cylindrical portion 202 </ b> A, and the spherical passage 204 communicates with the spherical passage 203.

  21 and 22, a ball passage unit 205 is provided behind the first start port member 202. In FIG. 21, a spherical passage 206 communicating with the spherical passage 204 is formed in the spherical passage unit 205, and the spherical passage 206 faces the spherical passage 204 in the front-rear direction.

  A discharge port 206 </ b> A that opens downward is formed on the bottom surface of the spherical passage 206, and the discharge port 206 </ b> A communicates with the spherical passage 206. Thereby, the game ball won in the first start port 32 passes through the ball passage 204 from the ball passage 203, is then discharged to the ball passage 206, and falls downward through the discharge port 206A.

  As shown in FIG. 24, when the lower movable effect member 101B is in the standby position, the outer ring member 117 is expanded radially from the state in which the outer ring member 117 is in contact with the outer peripheral portion of the circular member 116 (lower movable effect member). 101B is movable), the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 (the ball passage 206 is not shown) pass from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower part of the lower movable effect member 101B. Is provided.

  As a result, the ball paths 203, 204, and 206 of the present embodiment allow the game balls that have won the first starting port 32 to be placed from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower ring of the lower movable effect member 101B. Through the lower part of the member 117, the game board 1 is discharged to the back surface (or the back side, the lower side, etc.).

  20 to 22, the winning prize opening unit 201 includes a general winning opening member 207. The general winning opening member 207 is attached to the game board 1, and openings constituting the general winning ports 40 </ b> A to 40 </ b> C are formed at the upper end of the general winning port member 207.

  Ball passages 208 to 210 are provided inside the general prize opening member 207. The ball passage 208 communicates with the general winning opening 40A, extends to the right from the lower side (downstream) of the general winning opening 40A, and discharges the game balls won in the general winning opening 40A downstream.

  The ball passage 209 communicates with the general winning opening 40B and the ball passage 208 downstream of the general winning opening 40B and the ball passage 208. The ball passage 209 extends to the right from the lower side (downstream) of the general winning opening 40B, and discharges the game balls winning the general winning opening 40B and the game balls passing through the ball passage 208 downstream.

  The ball passage 210 communicates with the general winning opening 40C and the ball passage 209 downstream of the general winning opening 40C and the ball passage 209. The ball passage 210 extends downward from the general winning opening 40C, and discharges the game balls winning the general winning opening 40C and the game balls passing through the ball passage 209 downstream.

  The ball passage 209 merges with the ball passage 208 at the general winning opening 40B, and a passage area which is a cross-sectional area in the vertical direction perpendicular to the direction (left-right direction) through which the game ball passes is the passage area of the ball passage 208 It is formed larger than. That is, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208. For example, when the vertical width of the ball passage 208 is such that one game ball passes, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is such that at least two or more game balls pass. It is desirable to be.

  In the present embodiment, it is described that the vertical passage area of the ball passage 209 is formed larger than the passage area of the ball passage 208, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front and rear passage area is large. It may be formed. Furthermore, even when the passage area is large in both the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, an effect of facilitating discharge is desired.

  20 and 21, a discharge port 211 is formed below the ball passage 210. Thereby, the game ball won in the general winning opening 40A is discharged to the outlet 211 through the ball passages 208-210. The game balls won in the general winning opening 40B are discharged to the discharge port 211 through the ball passages 209 and 210, and the game balls won in the general winning opening 40C are discharged to the discharge port 211 through the ball passage 210.

  A spherical passage 212 communicating with the discharge port 211 is formed in the spherical passage unit 205, and the spherical passage 212 extends to the right after extending backward from the discharge port 211. A discharge port 212A is formed at the downstream end of the ball passage 212, and the game ball introduced into the ball passage 212 from the discharge port 211 is discharged downward from the discharge port 212A. The ball passages 208 to 210 and 212 of the present embodiment discharge the game balls won in the general winning ports 40A to 40C to the back of the game board 1 through the lower movable effect member 101B.

  20 and 21, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 communicate with the joining portion 213 through the discharge port 206A and the discharge port 212A, and the game ball and the general winning ports 40A to 40A that have won the first start port 32 are communicated. The game balls that have won the prize 40C join at the junction 213 (joining area) and are discharged to the back of the game board 1.

  20 and 21, a general winning opening left switch 400A is provided in the ball passage 212, and the general winning opening left switch 400A has a detection surface 400a in the vertical direction. As a result, the general winning opening left switch 400A detects a game ball flowing in the right direction (first direction) in the horizontal direction in the ball passage 212.

  The ball passage 206 is provided with a first start port switch 320, and the first start port switch 320 has a detection surface 320a in a left-right direction different from the detection surface 400a of the general winning port left switch 400A. As a result, the first start port switch 320 detects a game ball flowing in the vertical direction (second direction different from the first direction) in the ball passage 206.

  In FIG. 21, the first start opening switch 320 is installed in front of the general winning opening left switch 400A. 20 and 21, a magnetic sensor 214 is provided in the ball passage unit 205 below the lower movable effect member 101B. The magnetic sensor 214 is provided between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212, and The first start port 32 is located below.

  The magnetic sensor 214 is connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6), detects that a player has intentionally moved a magnet or the like to the first start port 32, and sends a magnetic signal to the main control circuit 60. Output. The main control circuit 60 transmits an abnormal signal to the hall computer 100 when a magnetic signal is input. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an illegal act such as illegally acquiring a game ball with respect to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment.

  Here, the first start port switch 320 constitutes a first sensor and a game medium detection member of the present invention. The general winning opening left switch 400A constitutes the second sensor of the present invention, and the magnetic sensor 214 constitutes the magnetic detection sensor of the present invention.

  In FIG. 20, the first start port member 202 is provided with an electric decoration board 215, and the electric decoration board 215 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 215 a. The LED 215a is controlled to emit light by the illumination board 215. Here, the first start port 32 of the present embodiment constitutes a winning opening of the present invention, and the ball passages 203 and 204 constitute an upstream game medium passage of the present invention. Moreover, the electrical decoration board | substrate 215 comprises the electrical decoration board | substrate of this invention.

  Further, the first start port member 202 of the present embodiment includes a first start port 32 in which a game ball can win, ball passages 203 and 204 for discharging the game ball won in the first start port 32 downstream, and light emission. A winning opening unit according to the present invention having an electric decoration board 215 is configured.

  Further, the ball passage 206 of the present embodiment constitutes the downstream game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passage unit 205 lowers the game balls discharged to the ball passages 203 and 204 of the first start port member 202. It constitutes a game medium passage portion of the present invention in which a ball passage 206 is formed to be discharged to the back of the game board 1 through the lower side of the side movable effect member 101B.

  In FIG. 22, one end of a cable 216 is connected to the electrical decoration board 215. The other end of the cable 216 is connected to a lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6). The illumination board 215 controls the lighting of the LED 215 a based on the control signal transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78. The cable 216 of this embodiment constitutes the wiring of the present invention. Here, the LED 215a is included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

  Note that the LED 215a may be capable of emitting light when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 or emitting light according to the effect. At this time, as a light emission mode of the LED 215a, after causing one LED 215a to emit light, the other LED 215a may emit light, or any LED 215a may emit light.

  In the present embodiment, it is described that the other end of the cable 216 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a relay board that relays the lamp control circuit 78 and the illumination board 215. It may be connected to. In this case, the relay board may be provided with an LED driver for controlling the LED 215a. In this case, the relay board can be recognized as an LED drive circuit.

  22 and 23, a U-shaped protrusion 217 is provided on the upper surface of the ball passage unit 205, and the protrusion 217 is located above the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 21). Projecting upward from the upper surface of the unit 205.

  In FIG. 22, the cable 216 extends downward from the electric decoration board 215, and extends to the rear of the spherical passage unit 205 along the spherical passage unit 205. A cable 216 extending to the rear of the ball passage unit 205 is fastened to the protrusion 217 by a binding member such as a band (not shown), and is wired below the game board 1 from the protrusion 217 through the slit 218 of the rear cover 1A.

  Note that cables (not shown) are connected to the first start opening switch 320, the general winning opening left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214, and these cables are also bundled and fastened to the protrusion 217 by a band or the like.

22 and 23, a semi-cylindrical member 219 is provided on the upper portion of the spherical passage unit 205, and the semi-cylindrical member 219 and the lower movable effect member 101B and the spherical passage so as to cover the upper side of the protrusion 217. It is provided between the unit 205 (see FIG. 23). The protrusion 217 of this embodiment constitutes a support part that supports the wiring of the present invention, and the semicylindrical member 219 constitutes a covering member of the present invention.
Here, supporting the wiring (guidance, guiding) includes the case where the wiring is fixed to the protrusion 217 with a band or the like, and may include the insertion of the wiring into the opening formed by the protrusion 217.

  Moreover, the 1st starting port 32 of this embodiment comprises the 1st prize opening of this invention, and the general prize opening 40A-40C comprises the 2nd prize opening of this invention. The spherical passages 204 and 206 constitute the first passage of the present invention, and the spherical passage 212 constitutes the second passage of the present invention.

  The ball passages 203, 204, and 206 constitute a game medium passage of the present invention. The ball passage 208 constitutes the first game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passages 209 and 210 constitute the second game medium passage of the present invention. The general winning opening 40A constitutes the first gaming medium winning opening of the present invention, and the general winning opening 40B, 40C constitutes the second gaming medium winning opening of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the gaming board 1 having the gaming area 1p on which the gaming ball rolls, and the lower side which is provided on the gaming board 1 and is movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect. A first start port 32 provided on the game board 1 so as to be positioned in front of the side movable effect member 101B and the lower movable effect member 101B, and a game ball that has passed through the first start port 32. Are provided on the back of the game board 1 through the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B. In the state in which the movable effect movable in the direction of the ball passages 203, 204, 206 below the lower movable effect member 101B can be executed and the lower movable effect member 101B is moved in the standby position, 03,204,206 is provided from the front of the lower movable directing member 101B so as to pass below the lower movable directing member 101B.

  Thereby, a space in which the lower movable effect member 101B can move at the standby position can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance by the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B.

  In addition, since a large installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B can be secured, the lower movable effect member 101B can be enlarged and the movable range of the outer ring member 117 of the lower movable effect member 101B at the standby position can be increased. Further, it is possible to more effectively enhance the rendering performance by the lower movable rendering member 101B.

Furthermore, by installing the first start port 32 in front of the lower movable effect member 101B, the lower side existing behind the first start port 32 can be viewed with respect to the player who has visually recognized the first start port 32 during the game. It becomes possible to visually recognize the movable effect member 101B. For this reason, the effect by the lower movable effect member 101B can be more effectively improved for the player.
In particular, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower movable effect member 101B executes a movable effect that is movable so as to expand in the radial direction at the standby position, so the movable range of the lower movable effect member 101B is expanded. It is possible to improve the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B.
Further, in a state where the lower movable effect member 101B is moved at the standby position, the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 are provided so as to pass from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower portion of the lower movable effect member 101B. Thus, since a wide space in which the movable accessory can move can be secured at the standby position, the lower movable effect member 101B can be moved so as to expand in a wider range in the radial direction. As a result, the lower movable effect member 101B can be dynamically moved, and the effect of the lower movable effect member 101B can be enhanced more effectively.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game board 1 passes through the general winning holes 40A to 40C through which the game balls can be won and the game balls that have passed through the first start opening 32 through the lower movable effect member 101B. The ball passages 204 and 206 to be discharged to the back surface of the player, the ball passage 212 to discharge the game balls having won the general winning openings 40A to 40C to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B, and the ball passage 206 Provided on the ball passage 212, having a detection surface 320 a for detecting a game ball discharged to the ball passage 206, and a first start port switch 320 for detecting a game ball rolling in the first direction. The first start port switch 32 includes a general winning port left switch 400A that has a detection surface 400a in a direction different from the detection surface 320a and detects a game ball that rolls in a second direction different from the first direction. There has been installed in front of the general prize hole left switch 400A.

  Further, a magnetic sensor 214 is provided so as to be positioned between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 below the lower movable effect member 101B. In addition, the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 are joined by a joining portion 213 (joining area) downstream in the game ball discharge direction.

  As a result, the spherical passage 206 and the spherical passage 212 can be installed in different directions, the horizontal direction and the vertical direction, and the spherical passage 206 and the spherical passage 212 can be joined by the junction 213.

  In addition, the first start port switch 320 is installed in front of the general winning port left switch 400A, and a magnetic sensor 214 is provided between the ball passage 206 and the ball passage 212 below the lower movable effect member 101B. Therefore, the three sensors including the first start port switch 320, the general winning port left switch 400A, and the magnetic sensor 214 can be installed in a small space below the lower movable effect member 101B.

  For this reason, it is possible to improve the performance by the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a general winning port 40A provided on the game board 1 and allowing a game ball to win, and a general winning port 40B provided on the game board 1 and allowing a game ball to win, 40C, a ball passage 208 that is provided in the game board 1 and discharges the game balls won in the general prize opening 40A downstream, and a game ball that is provided in the game board 1 and wins in the general prize openings 40B and 40C downstream. The ball passages 209 and 210 are discharged, and the ball passages 209 merge with the ball passages 208 downstream of the general winning opening 40B and have a vertical cross-sectional area perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls pass. The area is formed larger than the passage area of the spherical passage 208.

  Thereby, even if the number of game media passing through the ball passages 208 to 210 per unit time is increased in order to reduce the game speed, the game balls won from the general winning ports 40A and 40B are It is possible to prevent clogging downstream of 209. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly discharged to the downstream discharge port 211, and the gaming property can be improved.

  In particular, since the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed to be larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208, the area occupied by the ball passage 209 in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 is prevented from increasing. However, it is possible to prevent the game balls won from the general winning ports 40A and 40B from being clogged downstream of the ball passage 209.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the vertical width of the ball passage 209 is formed to be larger than the vertical width of the ball passage 208. The width may be formed larger than the width of the ball passage 208 in the front-rear direction. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game balls won from the general winning ports 40A and 40B from being jammed downstream of the ball passage 209 while preventing the area occupied by the ball passage 209 from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board 1. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a first start port 32 in which a game ball can be won, ball passages 203 and 204 for discharging the game ball won in the first start port 32 to the downstream, and an illumination board that can emit light. And a ball passage for discharging game balls discharged to the ball passages 203 and 204 of the first start opening member 202 to the back surface of the game board 1 through the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B. A ball passage unit 205 formed with 206, a first start port switch 320 that is provided in the ball passage 206 and detects a game ball passing through the ball passage 206, and a cable 216 connected to the illumination board 215. ing.

  In addition to this, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is provided on the upper surface of the ball passage unit 205 so as to be positioned above the ball passage unit 205, and a projection 217 that supports the cable 216 extending from the electrical decoration board 215. In addition, a semi-cylindrical member 219 provided between the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball path unit 205 is provided so as to cover the upper part of the protrusion 217.

  Thereby, the ball passages 203, 204, and 206 can be passed from the front of the lower movable effect member 101B to the lower side of the lower movable effect member 101B, and a space for moving the lower movable effect member 101B is secured. Can do. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance by the lower movable effect member 101B while sufficiently securing the installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B.

  Moreover, since a large installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B can be secured, it is possible to increase the size of the lower movable effect member 101B, and it is possible to more effectively enhance the performance by the lower movable effect member 101B. .

  In addition, the cable 216 extending from the electrical decoration board 215 can be supported by the protrusions 217, and the cable 216 extending from the electrical decoration board 215 can be prevented from flapping below the lower movable effect member 101B. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the cable 216 from interfering with the outer ring member 117 when the outer ring member 117 of the lower movable effect member 101B is movable, the outer ring member 117 can be moved smoothly, and the cable 216 is connected to the outer ring member 117. Can be protected from.

  Further, the cable 216 extending from the electric decoration board 215 is inserted into a protrusion 217A (see FIG. 22) provided in the vicinity of the electric decoration board 215 before the protrusion 217, and is bent downward with respect to the protrusion 217A. . As a result, the cable 216 is guided by the protrusion 217 </ b> A, so that a load is not applied to the connection portion between the electric decoration board 215 and the cable 216. In this way, the cable 216 is supported by the protrusion 217A.

  Note that the wiring (cable 216) is supported (guided or guided) by the protrusion 217A includes the case where the wiring is fixed to the protrusion 217A with a band or the like, and the wiring is inserted into the opening formed by the protrusion 217A. Can include.

  Further, by providing a semi-cylindrical member 219 between the lower movable effect member 101B and the ball path unit 205 so as to cover the upper part of the protrusion 217, the cable 216 and the lower movable effect member 101B are made to be a semi-cylindrical member. 219 can be shielded, and the cable 216 can be more effectively prevented from interfering with the outer ring member 117 when the outer ring member 117 is movable. Further, when the game ball flows down from the lower movable effect member 101B side, the game ball can be prevented from colliding with the cable 216 by colliding with the semi-cylindrical member 219, and the cable 216 can be removed from the game ball. Can protect.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the protrusion 217 is formed in a U shape protruding from the upper part of the ball passage unit 205, and the cable 216 is supported by the protrusion 217. For example, the cable 216 can be more effectively prevented from flapping below the lower movable effect member 101B.

  Further, the protrusion 217 may be formed in a substantially U shape, and the cable 216 may be accommodated in a space in the U shape of the protrusion 217. In this case, the protrusion 217 may be formed of a hard body or a soft body, and one end of the U-shaped side (the left portion or the right portion of the U shape) is a ball for inserting the cable 216 from the side. It is also possible to provide a passage unit 205 and a space. Even if it is a case where it is such a structure, it can prevent more effectively that the cable 216 flutters.

  In the lower movable effect member 101B of the present embodiment, the outer ring member 117 is disposed without a gap in the circumferential direction at the standby position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. In a state where the outer ring member 117 is in contact with the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical member 116 (see FIG. 15), the outer ring member 117 is configured to be positioned at a first position that is spaced apart in the circumferential direction via the gap 121. The outer ring member 117 may be movable between this first position (position shown in FIG. 25) and a second position (position shown in FIG. 26) radially outward of the rotating body 114.

  In this case, the ball paths 204 and 206 may be provided so as to pass through any one of the four gaps 121, for example, the lower gap 121. That is, the ball passages 204 and 206 may be provided so as to pass through the gap 121 in a state where the outer ring member 117 is located at the first position and the second position. The outer ring member 117 constitutes the movable part of the present invention, and the gap 121 constitutes the gap of the present invention.

  In this way, in addition to securing the installation space for the lower movable effect member 101B as described above, the ball path 204 can be installed in front of the lower movable effect member 101B while avoiding the outer ring member 117. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball passages 204 and 206 from being formed so as to be separated downward from the lower movable effect member 101B, and the installation space of the game board 1 can be reduced.

<Configuration and operation of upper movable production member 101A>
27 to 48 are views showing the upper movable effect member 101A and the game board 1 in a state in which the upper movable effect member 101A is movable. In FIGS. 27 to 48, the vertical and horizontal directions are the upper side as viewed from the player. This is the up / down / left / right direction of the movable effect member 101A. The upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment constitutes the movable accessory of the present invention.

  In FIG. 27, the upper movable production member 101A includes a front decoration 160 provided at the front, a case 161 provided at the rear, a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, a front movable base 164, The blade movable rack 165 (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is provided, and the case 161 is installed behind the game board 1.

  In FIG. 28, the case 161 includes a motor 166, a plurality of gears 167A and 167B, and an arm member 168.

  The motor 166 is fixed to the case 161, and rotatably supports the motor gear 166A. The gear 167A meshes with the motor gear 166A and the gear 167B, and the rotation of the motor gear 166A is transmitted to the gear 167B via the gear 167A.

  34 and 35, the gear 167B includes a protrusion 167b that rotates integrally with the gear 167B, and the protrusion 167b moves in the rotation direction of the gear 167B as the gear 167B rotates.

  28 and 30, the arm member 168 is attached to a swing shaft 168 </ b> A provided on the case 161. 34 and 35, a slit 168B is formed in the arm member 168, and a protrusion 167b is slidably fitted in the slit 168B.

  As the gear 167B rotates, the arm member 168 swings up and down about the swing shaft 168A as the projection 167b slides along the slit 168B. 28 and 30, the case 161 is provided with a torsion spring 196, and the torsion spring 196 urges the arm member 168 to swing upward.

  A slit 168C is formed in the arm member 168, and the fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 is fitted into the slit 168C. The case 161 is provided with a curved guide rail 161A, and a fitting protrusion 163A is slidably fitted to the guide rail 161A.

  Accordingly, the arm member 168 is stopped in a state of swinging upward along the guide rail 161A by being biased by the torsion spring 196 at the standby position.

  The fixed base 162 is attached to the case 161 and is fixed to the back of the game board 1 integrally with the case 161. A rack 162A is provided at a substantially central portion in the width direction of the fixed base 162 (a central portion in the left-right direction of the game board 1). The rack 162A extends in the extending direction (vertical direction) of the fixed base 162, and the rack 162A is formed with rack teeth 162a in which uneven portions are continuous in the vertical direction.

  The fixed base 162 is formed with a slit 162B that is positioned on the right side of the rack 162A and extends in the vertical direction. The fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 passes through the slit 162B and the slit 168C of the arm member 168. It is mated.

  The rear movable base 163 is movably provided with respect to the fixed base 162 so as to be positioned in front of the fixed base 162. As a result, the rear movable base 163 can move with respect to the game board 1.

  30 and 31, a guide rail 163B is provided at the center of the rear movable base 163 in the width direction on the back surface of the rear movable base 163, and the upper end of the guide rail 163B is open.

  In FIG. 30, a slit 163C is formed on the front surface of the rear movable base 163, and the slit 163C communicates with the guide rail 163B. An engagement protrusion 163D is formed at the lower part of the rear movable base 163, and the engagement protrusion 163D protrudes forward from the rear movable base 163.

  The guide rail 163B slidably holds the rack 162A so as to sandwich the rack 162A from both sides, and the rack teeth 162a protrude forward of the rear movable base 163 through the slit 163C. A plurality of gears 169A to 169E are rotatably provided on the front surface of the rear movable base 163 along the vertical direction.

  The uppermost gear 169A meshes with the rack teeth 162a of the rack 162A. When the arm member 168 swings in the vertical direction, the arm member 168 presses the fitting protrusion 163A in the vertical direction.

  As a result, the rear movable base 163 moves in the vertical direction with respect to the fixed base 162, and the gear 169A rotates along the rack teeth 162a. When the gear 169A rotates, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B to 169D.

  29 and 33, a protrusion 164A is provided at the right end of the front movable base 164 on the back surface of the front movable base 164. The protrusion 164A extends in the vertical direction, and the back surface of the front movable base 164 is provided. Protrudes backward from

  Rack teeth 164a having concavo-convex portions continuous in the vertical direction are formed on the protruding portion 164A, and a gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a. A central blade member 170 is integrally provided on the front movable base 164, and the central blade member 170 protrudes left and right outward from the front movable base 164.

  In FIG. 32, a guide member 164B is provided on the front surface of the front movable base 164 so as to face in the left-right direction, and a blade movable rack 165 is supported on the guide member 164B. Racks 165A and 165B are provided in the upper left and right direction of the movable blade rack 165. The racks 165A and 165B are formed of concave and convex portions that are continuous in the vertical direction, and rack teeth 165a and 165b facing each other are formed.

  In FIG. 33, a rack 165C is provided at the lower part of the central portion in the width direction of the movable blade rack 165, and the rack 165C is formed by uneven portions that are continuous in the vertical direction, and rack teeth 165c and 165d that face in opposite directions. Is formed.

  In FIG. 32, a pair of slits 165D is formed in the blade movable rack 165, and a fitting protrusion 164C formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164 is slidably fitted in the slit 165D.

  Thereby, the blade movable rack 165 is movable in the vertical direction along the fitting protrusion 164C with respect to the front movable base 164.

  The front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 are connected by a coil spring 171. An engaging portion 165F is provided on the upper portion of the blade movable rack 165, and one end portion of a coil spring 171 is attached to the engaging portion 165F. An engaging portion 164E is provided at the lower portion of the front movable base 164, and the other end portion of the coil spring 171 is attached to the engaging portion 164E. In FIG. 32, the coil spring 171 has shown the state shrunk to the maximum.

  The coil spring 171 urges the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 so that the engaging portion 165F and the engaging portion 164E approach each other.

  A left upper blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175 that are elongated in the longitudinal direction are attached to the front surface of the front movable base 164. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are located behind the decorative member 99 in the standby position and extend in the left-right direction whose longitudinal direction is the first direction. (For example, refer to FIGS. 36 and 38).

  Here, the state where the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are directed in the first direction corresponds to the first position. Further, the longitudinal direction and the extending direction indicate the same direction, and the direction extending long in each member is the longitudinal direction and the extending direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, a tooth part 172A is formed at the right end of the upper left blade member 172, and the tooth part 172A is rotatably supported by a shaft part 164G formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164. And meshes with the rack teeth 165b of the blade movable rack 165.

  A tooth portion 173A is formed at the left end portion of the upper right blade member 173, and the tooth portion 173A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164H formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack. 165 meshes with rack teeth 165a.

  A tooth portion 174A is formed at the right end portion of the left lower blade member 174. The tooth portion 174A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164I formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack. 165 meshes with rack teeth 165d (see FIG. 33).

  A tooth portion 175A is formed at the left end portion of the lower right blade member 175. The tooth portion 175A is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 164J formed on the front surface of the front movable base 164, and the blade movable rack. It meshes with the rack teeth 165c of 165 (see FIG. 33).

  In FIG. 33, the front movable base 164 has an opening 164F. An engagement protrusion 165G is formed on the back surface of the blade movable rack 165. As shown in FIG. 40, the engaging protrusion 165G protrudes rearward through the opening 164F and overlaps with the engaging protrusion 163D in the vertical direction.

  In the upper movable production member 101 </ b> A of the present embodiment, when the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the rear movable base 163, the engagement protrusion 165 </ b> G of the blade movable rack 165 has the rear movable base 163. Engages with the engaging protrusion 163D (see FIG. 47B).

  As a result, the blade movable rack 165 is restricted from further downward movement, and the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the blade movable rack 165 against the urging force of the coil spring 171 (FIG. 47 ( c)).

  When the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the blade movable rack 165, the tooth portions 172A and 173A meshing with the rack teeth 165a and 165b, respectively, rotate as shown in FIG. As a result, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 swing and unite from the first direction facing the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (second direction) perpendicular to the horizontal direction.

  At the same time, as shown in FIG. 37, the tooth portions 174A and 175A meshing with the rack teeth 165c and 165d respectively rotate. As a result, the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 swing and unite from the first direction facing the horizontal direction to the vertical direction (second direction) orthogonal to the first direction. .

  In FIG. 37, magnets 197A and 197B are provided on the mating surfaces of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175. Specifically, when the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 are moved so as to face in the vertical direction, the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 are provided so as to face each other in the horizontal direction. Magnets 197A, 197B are attracted to each other. Thereby, the lower left wing member 174 and the lower right wing member 175 are brought close to each other by the magnets 197A and 197B and are united by being attracted. The left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 may be close to each other without being united.

In the upper movable effect member 101A of the present embodiment, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are combined so as to face in the vertical direction, and the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are directed in the vertical direction. The position moved so as to be combined with each other corresponds to the movable position of the present invention (see FIG. 48). At the movable position, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively extended from a relatively contracted state (standby state).
Here, to be in a relatively contracted state, in other words, the overlapping of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 becomes large, and the relatively extended state. That is, the overlap of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is reduced.

  27, 28, and 32, the front decoration 160 is fixed to the front movable base 164. 38 and 39, the front decoration 160 incorporates an electric decoration board 160A having a plurality of LEDs 160a, and the electric decoration board 160A controls the light emission of the LEDs 160a. In addition, the front surface of the front decoration 160 is composed of a lens, and the LED 160a emits light through the lens.

  Each of the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 incorporates electric decoration boards 181 to 184. The electrical decoration boards 181 to 184 include a plurality of LEDs 181a to 184a, respectively, and the electrical decoration boards 181 to 184 control the light emission of the LEDs 181a to 184a.

  An electric decoration board 195 is built in the central blade member 170. The illumination board 195 includes a plurality of LEDs 195a, and controls the light emission of these LEDs 195a.

  The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a are composed of, for example, RGB full color LEDs. In the RGB full color LED, LEDs of three primary colors of red, green and blue are accommodated in one package, and lighting of different colors is possible by appropriately combining these three primary colors. Here, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a are included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

  In FIG. 31, a relay board 185 is attached to the back surface of the case 161, and the relay board 185 transmits a control signal to the electrical decoration boards 160 </ b> A, 181 to 184 and 195 via the flexible cable 186. The relay board 185 relays the control signal transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78 (see FIG. 6) and transmits it to the electrical boards 160A, 181 to 184 and 195, and controls the light emission of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a and 195a.

  The front surface of the front decoration 160, the central blade member 170, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 of the present embodiment is composed of lenses, and LEDs 160a and 181a. When ˜184a and 195a are emitted, the front is clearly irradiated through the lens.

  One end 186 a of the flexible cable 186 is connected to the relay substrate 185. The other end 186 b of the flexible cable 186 is attached to the front movable base 164 by being locked to a slit 164 K described later of the front movable base 164.

  45 and 46, the fixed base 162 is formed with slits 162C, 162D, and 162E arranged vertically. The flexible cable 186 extending forward from the case 161 is wired to the front surface of the fixed base 162 through the slit 162C, and then wired to the back surface of the fixed base 162 through the slit 162D.

  The flexible cable 186 wired on the back surface of the fixed base 162 is wired in front of the front movable base 164 through the slit 162E.

  In FIG. 31, an opening 163a is formed on the upper surface of the rear movable base 163, and in FIG. 30, an opening 163b is formed on the lower surface of the rear movable base 163.

  In a state in which the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, the flexible cable 186 wired forward from the fixed base 162 passes through the opening 163a of the rear movable base 163 to the rear side. It is accommodated in the movable base 163, extends from the rear movable base 163 to the front movable base 164 through the opening 163b, and is bent between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164.

  45, a slit 164K is formed in the front movable base 164, and the other end 186b of the flexible cable 186 bent between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 is connected to the rear movable base 163. It extends upward from below between the front movable bases 164 and is connected to the electric decoration board 195 through the slits 164K.

  33, 45, and 46, a clip 199 is attached to the back surface of the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 is locked to the slit 164K by the clip 199. The clip 199 is fixed to the front movable base 164 by a screw 199A (see FIG. 33) so as to cover the slit 164K. The clip 199 has a rib 199a protruding forward, and the rib 199a presses the flexible cable 186 against the electric decoration board 195, thereby positioning the flexible cable 186 (see FIGS. 45 and 46).

  The flexible cable 186 is configured to be locked to the slit 164K by the clip 199. However, as a result of the locking, the portion of the flexible cable 186 that comes into contact with the clip 199 does not move at all, and a case where a certain amount of movement is possible. Can be included.

  Since it is sufficient if positioning can be performed as an effect, if a fold or the like is formed in the flexible cable 186 and is brought into contact with the clip 199, even if the flexible cable 186 moves, the crease contacts the clip 199 and returns to the original position. A configuration that helps to return is also envisaged.

  45 and 46, the slits 162D and 162E arranged vertically on the fixed base 162 are formed so that the vertical interval is short, and the flexible cable 186 is locked to the slits 162D and 162E. Locking firmly to 162 prevents the fixed base 162 from coming off. Here, the illumination board 195 is connected to the illumination boards 160A and 181 to 184 via a cable (not shown), and a control signal is transmitted to the illumination boards 160A and 181 to 184 via the illumination board 195. The

  30, 45, and 46, a protrusion 198 is provided on the front surface of the fixed base 162, and the protrusion 198 extends from the surface of the fixed base 162 toward the rear movable base 163. .

  As shown in FIG. 45, the flexible cable 186 is fixed to the fixed base 162 when the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the standby position and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted. The rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are bent and accommodated, and are bent by being pressed against the protrusion 198.

  That is, the flexible cable 186 is further bent by the protruding portion 198 in a state where the flexible cable 186 is bent and accommodated between the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164.

  As described above, the flexible cable 186 is engaged with the fixed base 162 and the front movable base 164, bent from the fixed base 162 at the rear movable base 163, and extended to the front movable base 164. .

  When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 extend relatively, the flexible cable 186 has one end 186a slit in the fixed base 162. 162D and 162E are engaged, and the other end 186b extends with the clip 199 engaged with the slit 164K of the front movable base 164.

  As described above, the flexible cable 186 changes into a state where it is extended from the slits 162D and 162E of the fixed base 162 and a slit 164K of the front movable base 164 and a state where it is bent.

  30, 31, and 46, the slits 162 </ b> C, 162 </ b> D, and 162 </ b> E of the fixed base 162 and the openings 163 a and 163 b of the rear movable base 163 are racks 162 </ b> A provided at the center in the width direction of the rear movable base 163. Is formed on the opposite side of the gears 169A to 169E.

  That is, in the rear movable base 163, the gears 169A to 169E are installed on the right side of the rack 162A at the center in the width direction of the rear movable base 163, and the flexible cable 186 is movable rearward. The base 163 is wired to the left, which is the other side of the center in the width direction.

  In FIG. 31, guide grooves 187 and 188 are formed on the back surface of the case 161, and the guide grooves 188 extend in a direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the guide grooves 187. doing. A flexible cable 186 is fitted in the guide grooves 187 and 188, and the flexible cable 186 is wired along the guide grooves 187 and 188 from the relay substrate 185 and extends forward from the case 161.

  The guide groove 187 has a bottom surface 187c inclined downward from one end portion 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position of the relay substrate 185 and the flexible cable 186 toward the other end portion 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. Have.

  The flexible cable 186 is folded at the position where the other end portion 187b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end portion 188a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other and extends in the vertical direction and is fitted into the guide groove 188. Is done. The flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by a fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other.

  The guide groove 188 has a bottom surface 188c that is inclined from one end 188a in the extending direction toward the other end 188b in the extending direction.

  In FIG. 33, a protrusion 164M is provided on the left side of the front movable base 164 on the back surface of the front movable base 164. The protrusion 164M extends in the vertical direction of the front movable base 164 so as to face the protrusion 164A in the left-right direction of the game board 1, and protrudes rearward from the front movable base 164.

  Rack teeth 164a are formed on the inner surface of the protrusion 164A facing the protrusion 164M. Ribs 164s and 164t are formed on the protruding portion 164M and the protruding portion 164A, respectively. The ribs 164s and 164t are bent outward from the rear ends of the protruding portions 164M and 164A, respectively.

  30, 31, 41, and 43, guide grooves 163 </ b> F and 163 </ b> G are provided on both left and right sides of the rear movable base 163, and the guide grooves 163 </ b> F and 163 </ b> G are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the rear movable base 163. It extends to. Ribs 164s and 164t (see FIG. 33) of the protruding portions 164A and 164M are slidably fitted in the guide grooves 163F and 163G, and the front movable base 164 is movable rearward along the guide grooves 163F and 163G. It moves up and down with respect to the base 163.

  In FIG. 30, a guide surface 163 v is formed on the front surface of the left side portion of the rear movable base 163. 32 and 33, a guide surface 164v is formed on the back surface of the front movable base 164 on the left outer side from the protrusion 164M of the front movable base 164.

  In FIG. 41, the guide surface 163v faces the guide surface 164v in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion 164M moves relative to the rear movable base 163 in the vertical direction along the guide groove 163F and the guide surface 163v. .

  In FIG. 30, a guide surface 163 w is formed on the front surface of the right side portion of the rear movable base 163. 32 and 33, a guide surface 164w is formed on the back surface of the front movable base 164 on the right outside of the protrusion 164A of the front movable base 164.

  43 and 44, the guide surface 163w faces the guide surface 164w in the front-rear direction, and the protruding portion 164A extends in the vertical direction with respect to the rear movable base 163 along the guide groove 163G and the guide surface 163w. Move relative.

  That is, the upper movable production member 101A of the present embodiment has guide grooves 163F and 163G and guide surfaces 163v and 163w extending along the longitudinal direction at the side of the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is The ribs 164s and 164t extend in the longitudinal direction and support the guide grooves 163F and 163G and the guide surfaces 163v and 163w so as to be relatively movable, and projecting portions 164A and 164M having the guide surfaces 164v and 164w.

  41 and 43, guide protrusions 190 and 191 are provided on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w on the back surface of the front movable base 164, respectively. The guide protrusions 190 and 191 are provided on the upper end side with respect to the central portion in the vertical direction of the front movable base 164 and project from the guide surfaces 164v and 164w toward the rear movable base 163.

  The guide protrusions 190 and 191 include inclined surfaces 190a and 191a, and vertical surfaces 190b and 191b extending above the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a and extending in the vertical direction. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are uphill from the center in the extending direction of the front movable base 164 toward the upper end (corresponding to the end of the present invention).

  Thereby, the protrusion amount of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 from the guide surfaces 164v and 164w increases toward the upper end portion in the extending direction of the front movable base 164 on the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a. Therefore, the protrusion amounts of the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b are the same as the maximum protrusion amount of the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a, and the same protrusion amount up to the upper end.

  Lower stoppers 163x and 163y are respectively provided at the ends of the guide surfaces 163v and 163w on both the left and right sides of the rear movable base 163. The lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided at the lower end of the rear movable base 163, and project from the guide surfaces 163v and 163w toward the front movable base 164.

  Thereby, in a state where the upper movable production member 101A moves to the movable position and the end of the rear movable base 163 and the end of the front movable base 164 overlap each other, the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 When the lower stoppers 163x and 163y are opposed to each other, the gap between the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is that of the rear movable base 163 excluding the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. This is smaller than the gap between the guide surfaces 163v and 163w and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164.

  That is, the distance between the guide surfaces 164v and 164w on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the present embodiment as the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position toward the movable position. Are provided with inclined surfaces 190a, 191a such that the separation distance is gradually narrowed.

  The guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the present embodiment constitute the first guide portion of the present invention. The guide surfaces 164v and 164w constitute a second guide portion of the present invention, and the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a of the present invention are formed on the guide surfaces 164w and 164v. Further, the lower stoppers 163x and 163y constitute a protruding portion of the present invention.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the guide portion is a rail (passage, eaves, or the like) that guides the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, but is not limited thereto, and is in contact with or close to the guide portion. If there is an effect of limiting the moving direction of the member, it can be expressed as a guide. Moreover, the inclination which arises when the gears 169A-169E which are drive systems are biased to one side in the left-right direction by the guide part can also be prevented.

  Upper stoppers 190z and 191z are provided at the upper ends of the guide surfaces 164v and 164w. The upper stoppers 190z and 191z protrude from the guide surfaces 164v and 164w to the rear movable base 163.

  The upper stoppers 190z and 191z are engaged with the lower stoppers 163x and 163y when the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the rear movable base 163, so that the front movable base 164 and the rear movable base 163 are engaged. To prevent excessive movement.

  Here, the case 161 of the present embodiment constitutes a main body member of the present invention, and the fixed base 162 constitutes a main body member and a fixed base of the present invention. The rear movable base 163 constitutes the main body member and the first movable base of the present invention. The rack teeth 162a of the fixed base 162 constitute the first uneven portion of the present invention, and the rack 162A constitutes the first rack of the present invention. The gear 169A constitutes the first gear of the present invention, and the gears 169B to 169E constitute the second gear of the present invention. Further, the rack 162A, the gears 169A to 169E, and the protruding portion 164A constitute a moving mechanism of the present invention.

  The front movable base 164 constitutes a main body member and a second movable base of the present invention, and the engagement protrusion 163D constitutes a first engagement portion of the present invention. The rack teeth 164a constitute the second uneven portion of the present invention, and the projecting portion 164A constitutes the second rack of the present invention.

  The blade movable rack 165 constitutes a third movable base of the present invention, and the engagement protrusion 165G constitutes a second engagement portion of the present invention. The upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 constitute a movable member of the present invention.

  The flexible cable 186 constitutes the wiring of the present invention, and the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a and 195a constitute the light emitting member of the present invention. The coil spring 171 constitutes an urging member of the present invention. The relay board 185 constitutes the wiring board of the present invention, and the magnets 197A and 197B constitute the attracting member of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the upper movable effect member 101A will be described.
When the upper movable production member 101A is in the standby position, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 47A, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are in a relatively contracted state. It has become. In this state, the upper movable effect member 101A is located behind the decorative member 99 (see FIGS. 3 and 48).

  When the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, a control signal is transmitted from the lamp control circuit 78 to the relay board 185 (see FIG. 31). The relay board 185 transmits a control signal to the electric decoration boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 (see FIG. 39) via the flexible cable 186 based on the control signal.

  The illumination boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 have the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a based on the control signal transmitted from the relay board 185 in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position. By controlling the light emission, the color of the decorative member 99 visually recognized from the front is changed, and when the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the movable position from the standby position, the decorative member 99 visually recognized from the front of the decorative member 99 is displayed. As the color changes, the emission color of the upper movable effect member 101A is easily visible.

  The LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a emit light in the same color as the front decoration 160, for example, blue if the front decoration 160 is blue. Thereby, the decorative member 99 emits blue light.

  When the front decoration 160 is colored, even if the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a emit white light, the color of the front decoration 160 is from the front of the gaming machine (from the player side). Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the emission color of the upper movable effect member 101A.

  If the upper movable effect member 101A moves downward in such a state, the player's line of sight follows the upper movable effect member 101A, and the player's interest gathers in the upper movable effect member 101A and the liquid crystal behind. .

  On the other hand, the front decoration 160 becomes darker (or returns to the original color by losing the light emitter) due to the absence of the light emitter of the upper movable effect member 101A located behind, and changes in color and brightness. Thus, even the interest that was in the front decoration 160 is gathered in the upper movable production member 101A.

  By providing such an effect mode, an effective effect can be performed by the upper movable effect member 101A and the front decoration 160. In particular, when the front decoration 160 is blue, for example, the upper movable effect member 101A emits red light to make the front decoration 160 appear purple, or the blue of the front decoration 160 is the material. If the upper movable effect member 101A emits red light only if it looks blue due to its thickness, the front decoration 160 is also visually recognized in red.

  In any case, since the upper movable effect member 101A is movable, the front decoration 160 loses the light emitter, thereby changing the visibility, while the light emission mode of the upper movable effect member 101A is easily visible. It is thought that the interest of the elderly will improve.

  In addition, in a state where the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a are not emitting light, the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a emit white light even if the color for viewing the front decoration 160 is blue. By doing so, the front decoration 160 may appear white.

  In order to move the upper movable effect member 101A from the standby position to the movable position, first, as shown in FIG. 34, the motor 166 is rotated in one direction (forward rotation) from the standby position. When the motor 166 rotates in one direction, the rotation is transmitted from the motor gear 166A to the gears 167A and 167B, and the protrusion 167b provided on the gear 167B moves along the extending direction of the slit 168B of the arm member 168.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 35, the arm member 168 swings downward along the guide rail 161A of the case 161 with the swinging shaft 168A as a fulcrum. At this time, the fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 fitted to the slit 168C of the arm member 168 is pressed downward, the rear movable base 163 moves downward with respect to the fixed base 162, and the fixed base 162 And the rear movable base 163 extend relatively.

  When the rear movable base 163 moves downward, the gear 169A meshing with the rack teeth 162a rotates but moves downward together with the rear movable base 163. Accordingly, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B, 169C, and 169D, and the gear 169E moves downward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating.

  Since the gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a of the front movable base 164, when the gear 169E rotates and moves downward together with the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move to. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 46, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively extended.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram for easily explaining the movement of the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165, and the movement of the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 with the rear movable base 163 fixed. Is drawn.

  When the front movable base 164 moves downward as the rear movable base 163 moves downward, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 move together and move downward to the lower part of the rear movable base 163. The engaging protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165 engages with the formed engaging protrusion 163D (see FIG. 47B).

  When the engagement protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165 is engaged with the engagement protrusion 163D, the blade movable rack 165 is restricted from moving downward, and only the front movable base 164 is downward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  When the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the rear movable base 163, the teeth 172A and 173A meshing with the rack teeth 165a and 165b, respectively, rotate as shown in FIGS. 35 and 37, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 swing and unite so as to face in the up and down direction from the state in the horizontal direction.

  At the same time, the tooth portions 174A and 175A meshing with the rack teeth 165c and 165d rotate, and the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 swing from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction. Unite.

  Since the magnets 197A and 197B are provided on the mating surfaces of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, when the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are combined in the vertical direction, The blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are attracted by the magnets 197A and 197B.

  When the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the blade movable rack 165 from the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the inner peripheral upper end of the opening 164F of the front movable base 164 contacts the engagement protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165. By contacting, the front movable base 164 is restricted from moving downward relative to the blade movable rack 165. At this time, a gap is formed between the lower end of the inner periphery of the opening 164F of the front movable base 164 and the engaging protrusion 165G.

  When the front movable base 164 moves downward with respect to the movable blade rack 165 in this way, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are horizontally oriented. Swing together from the state so as to face up and down at the same time.

  Further, when the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 move to a relatively extended state, as shown in FIG. 46, the slits 162D and 162E of the fixed base 162 and the slit 164K of the front movable base 164 are obtained. The flexible cable 186 extends from the starting point. Accordingly, the control signal is stably transmitted from the flexible cable 186 to the electric decoration boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195.

  In this way, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 move from the relatively contracted state to the relatively extended state, and the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position (FIG. 48). The movement to (see) is completed.

  Further, when the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relatively extended when the upper movable production member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the front movable base 164 is shown in FIGS. As described above, the ribs 164s and 164t and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the protrusions 164A and 164M are supported by the guide grooves 163F and 163G and the guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the rear movable base 163 and move downward.

  In the process in which the front movable base 164 moves downward relative to the rear movable base 163, that is, in the process of moving from the standby state shown in FIGS. 41 and 43 to the movable position shown in FIGS. After the inclined surfaces 190a and 191a of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 pass through the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the rear movable base 163, the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b face the lower stoppers 163x and 163y.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position and the end of the rear movable base 163 and the end of the front movable base 164 overlap, the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 The lower stoppers 163x and 163y face each other, and the gap between the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is a guide for the rear movable base 163 excluding the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. This is smaller than the gap between the surfaces 163v and 163w and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164.

  As described above, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, a control signal is transmitted from the relay board 185 to the electrical decoration boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195 via the flexible cable 186. The LED 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and the LED 160a, 181a, 182a, 184a, 184a, 184a, 184a, 184a, 184a, 184a, 184a, 184a, 184a 195 emits light.

  When the LEDs 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, and 195a are controlled to emit light, the upper movable effect member 101A may continue to emit light in any color until it moves from the standby position to the movable position. The upper movable effect member 101A may emit light in an arbitrary color when it moves to the movable position. However, it is preferable to emit light in different colors at the standby position and the movable position.

  Next, when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved from the movable position shown in FIGS. 37 and 39 to the standby position, the motor 166 is rotated in the other direction (reverse rotation) in FIGS. When the motor 166 rotates in the other direction, the rotation is transmitted from the motor gear 166A to the gears 167A and 167B, and the protrusion 167b moves along the extending direction of the slit 168B of the arm member 168.

  Thus, the arm member 168 swings upward while being guided by the guide rail 161A of the case 161 with the swing shaft 168A as a fulcrum. At this time, when the fitting protrusion 163A of the rear movable base 163 fitted to the slit 168C of the arm member 168 is pressed upward, the rear movable base 163 moves upward with respect to the fixed base 162.

  When the rear movable base 163 moves upward, the gear 169A that meshes with the rack teeth 162a rotates and moves upward together with the rear movable base 163. Accordingly, the rotation of the gear 169A is transmitted to the gear 169E via the gears 169B, 169C, and 169D, and the gear 169E moves upward together with the rear movable base 163 while rotating.

  Since the gear 169E meshes with the rack teeth 164a of the front movable base 164, when the gear 169E rotates and moves upward together with the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163. Move to. When the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164 and the rear movable base 163 move upward so as to be relatively contracted.

  When the front movable base 164 moves upward from the state shown in FIG. 47C, the front movable base 164 moves upward by the gap between the inner peripheral lower end of the opening 164F and the engagement protrusion 165G. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 47B, the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the blade movable rack 165.

  Further, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 are connected by a coil spring 171, and the coil spring 171 is connected to the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 so that the engagement portion 165 F and the engagement portion 164 E approach each other. Is energized.

  Thus, when the front movable base 164 moves upward by the gap between the inner peripheral lower end of the opening 164F and the engagement protrusion 165G, the front movable base 164 is assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring 171. Quickly move upward with respect to the movable rack 165.

  When the front movable base 164 moves upward with respect to the blade movable rack 165, the tooth portions 172A and 173A meshing with the rack teeth 165a and 165b respectively rotate as shown in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 are swung from the state of being directed in the vertical direction to the horizontal direction to release the coalescence.

  At the same time, the tooth portions 174A and 175A meshing with the rack teeth 165c and 165d are rotated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36, the left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 swing from the vertically oriented state to the horizontal direction to release the coalescence.

  That is, when the blade movable rack 165 moves upward, the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are simultaneously directed in the horizontal direction from the vertically oriented state. And the coalescence is released.

  When the front movable base 164 moves further together with the rear movable base 163 while the gear 169E rotates, the front movable base 164 moves relatively upward with respect to the rear movable base 163.

  At this time, the front movable base 164 and the blade movable rack 165 are integrally moved upward with respect to the rear movable base 163, and the engagement protrusion 165G of the blade movable rack 165 is moved to the rear as shown in FIG. The upper movable base 163 is spaced upward from the engaging protrusion 163D.

  When the motor 166 is driven to the initial position and the arm member 168 swings to the upper end of the guide rail 161A of the case 161, the driving of the motor 166 is stopped. At this time, as shown in FIG. 47A, the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted.

  Furthermore, when the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted, as shown in FIG. 45, the flexible cable 186 has the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base. It is bent and accommodated between the bases 164 and is bent by being pressed against the projecting portion 198.

  An opening 163a is formed in the upper part of the back surface of the rear movable base 163 of the present embodiment, and an opening 163b is formed in the lower part of the surface of the rear movable base 163. The flexible cable 186 The rear movable base 163 is accommodated in the rear movable base 163 through the opening 163a, and extends from the rear movable base 163 to the front movable base 164 through the opening 163b.

  Thereby, the flexible cable 186 can be easily wired from the fixed base 162 to the front movable base 164 through the rear movable base 163.

  In this way, by moving the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 from the relatively extended state to the relatively contracted state, the upper movable effect member 101A is moved from the movable position to the standby position. The moving operation is completed (see FIG. 3).

  In the process in which the front movable base 164 moves upward relative to the rear movable base 163, that is, in the process in which the front movable base 164 moves from the unfolded state shown in FIGS. The lower stoppers 163x and 163y of 163 face the guide surfaces 164v and 164w after passing through the inclined surfaces 190a and 191 from the vertical surfaces 190b and 191b of the guide protrusions 190 and 191 of the front movable base 164.

  Since the gap between the guide surfaces 164v and 164w and the lower stoppers 163x and 163y is larger than the gap between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide protrusions 190 and 191, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are relative to each other. When moving so as to shrink, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 can be smoothly moved.

  Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the upper movable production member 101A is relatively moved with respect to the rear movable base 163 provided to be movable with respect to the game board 1 and the rear movable base 163. Provided on the front movable base 164 and the rear movable base 163 that swingably support the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175. The engagement protrusion 163D is slidably provided on the front movable base 164, and moves with respect to the front movable base 164 so that the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right portion A movable blade rack 16 that swings the blade member 175 between a first position extending in a first direction in the horizontal direction and a second position extending in a second direction facing in the up-down direction. And an engagement protrusion 165G provided on the movable blade rack 165 and engageable with the engagement protrusion 163D, a coil spring having one end attached to the front movable base 164 and the other end attached to the movable blade rack 165. 171.

  When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the upper movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 move so as to extend relatively, and the engagement protrusion 165G becomes the engagement protrusion 163D. The blade movable rack 165 is slid to engage the left upper blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 from the first position to the second position. When swinging and moving from the movable position to the standby position, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are moved from the second position by the coil spring 171. The blade movable rack 165 is urged so as to swing to the position 1.

  Thereby, when the upper movable production member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are moved so as to extend relatively, and the upper left blade member 172, upper right The part blade member 173, the left lower blade member 174, and the right lower blade member 175 can be swung from the first position to the second position. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance by the upper movable production member 101A.

  When the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the movable position to the standby position, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are moved by the coil spring 171 to the second position. Since the blade movable rack 165 is urged so as to swing from the first position to the first position, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are moved to the second position. It is possible to quickly return from the position to the first position. Thereby, the rendering performance of the upper movable rendering member 101A can be improved more effectively.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A is fixed to the rear cover 1A, the case 161 having the rack 162A in which the rack teeth 162a continuous in the longitudinal direction are formed, and the case 161 A rear movable base 163 having gears 169A, 169A to 169E to which power is transmitted from the gear 169A, and engagement protrusions 163D, and a movable relative to the rear movable base 163. A front movable base 164 having a protruding portion 164A formed with rack teeth 164a that are freely provided and continuously meshed with the gear 169E in the longitudinal direction, and is movably provided on the front movable base 164 and is engaged with the engagement protrusion 163D. A movable blade rack 165 having a mating engagement protrusion 165G and a front movable base 164 A left upper blade member 172 that is provided and can swing between a first position in which the longitudinal direction is directed in the horizontal direction and a second position in which the longitudinal direction is directed in the vertical direction as the blade movable rack 165 is moved, A part blade member 173, a left lower blade member 174, and a right lower blade member 175 are provided.

  In addition, the upper movable effect member 101A includes an upper movable effect member 101A having a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, and a front movable base 164. The guide surfaces 163v and 163w of the rear movable base 163 are provided on the guide surfaces 163v and 163w. Lower stoppers 163x and 163y are provided, and inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are formed on the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164, respectively. The inclined surfaces 190a and 191a are formed between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y as the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position toward the movable position. It is inclined so that the separation distance, which is the distance, gradually decreases.

  When the upper movable production member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the end of the rear movable base 163 in the extending direction so that the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 extend relatively. The end of the front movable base 164 in the extending direction overlaps, and the engaging protrusion 165G engages with the engaging protrusion 163D, so that the blade movable rack 165 has the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left The part blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 are swung from the first position to the second position.

  As a result, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves to the movable position, the distance between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y becomes the shortest. When the movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the overlapping of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is small (the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 When the end portions in the extending direction of the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 overlap with a short length, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are firmly connected. Can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling from occurring when the upper movable effect member 101A is moved to the movable position.

  Further, when the upper movable production member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the lower stoppers 163x and 163y of the rear movable base 163 can be moved along the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164. . As a result, the overlap of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is small and the overlap is large (the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 are relatively contracted). As a result, the upper movable effect member 101A can be smoothly operated.

  In addition to the smallest separation distance between the lower stoppers 163x and 163y and the guide surfaces 164v and 164w facing the lower stoppers 163x and 163y, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, and the lower left blade member Since the 174 and the lower right wing member 175 swing from the first position to the second position, it is possible to more effectively improve the performance of the movable accessory.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 are provided with lower stoppers 163x and 163y and upper stoppers 190z and 191z, and face the lower stoppers 163x and 163y. Although the guide surfaces 164v and 164w of the front movable base 164 are provided, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, any movable base (or guide portion or the like) is provided with a projection (projection portion or the like), and there is an inclined surface facing the projection. As long as the movable base can be moved stably by the protrusion and the inclined surface even if the movable base moves, it is sufficient if such an effect can be obtained. Each configuration, such as the number and arrangement, is not limited.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a decorative member 99 provided on the game board 1 so as to be positioned in front of the upper movable effect member 101A, and the upper movable effect member 101A is long in the longitudinal direction. The upper blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175, the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 are provided. LEDs 181 to 184 are provided.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the upper left wing member 172, the upper right wing member 173, the lower left wing member 174, and the lower right wing member 175 are located behind the decorative member 99 in the standby position. The LED 181a to 184a emit light toward the decorative member 99, and the upper movable effect member 101A is moved from the standby position to the movable position. When moved, the longitudinal direction is moved in the second direction orthogonal to the first direction and merged. Thereby, the stage performance by 101 A of upper side movable production | presentation members can be improved more effectively.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lower left wing member 174 and the lower right wing member 175 have the magnets 197A and 197B, and the lower left wing member 174 and the lower right wing member 175 are in the second direction. When it moves, it faces in the left-right direction and is attracted by magnets 197A, 197B.

  Thereby, the state which the lower left blade | wing member 174 and the right lower blade | wing member 175 united can be maintained stably. For this reason, the swinging of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 that move integrally with the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175 occur. This can be prevented, and the performance by the upper left blade member 172, the upper right blade member 173, the lower left blade member 174, and the lower right blade member 175 can be more effectively enhanced.

  The magnets 197A and 197B may be attached to the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173 instead of the lower left blade member 174 and the lower right blade member 175, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member. 173, left lower wing member 174 and right lower wing member 175 may be attached.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is mounted on the game board 1 so as to be positioned in front of the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a provided on the upper movable effect member 101A and the upper movable effect member 101A located at the standby position. The LED 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a is a full-color LED that can emit light in different colors in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A is positioned at the standby position and the movable position. It is configured.

  Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a light emitting member such as an LED on the decorative member 99, and the decorative member 99 can be caused to emit light by the upper movable effect member 101A. For this reason, the structure of the decoration member 99 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decoration member 99 can be reduced. In addition to this, various color effects can be implemented by the upper movable effect member 101A, and the performance of the upper movable effect member 101A can be improved.

  Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A that is emitting light moves from the standby position to the movable position, the decoration member 99 does not emit light as the upper movable effect member 101A moves. At this time, by moving the upper movable effect member 101A downward while emitting light, it is possible to focus attention on the upper movable effect member 101A moving downward while emitting the player's line of sight. Thereby, the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be made to stand out.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LED 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a emits light in the same color as the color of the decorative member 99 in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A is on standby. Can be emphasized, and the performance of the upper movable production member 101A can be improved more effectively.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a flexible cable 186 connected to the LED 160a, 181a to 184a, and 195a electric boards 160A, 181 to 184, and 195, and the flexible cable 186 is movable to the fixed base 162 and the front side. By being locked to the base 164, it is bent from the fixed base 162 by the rear movable base 163 and extended to the front movable base 164 for wiring.

  Thus, when the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 move to a relatively extended position and a relatively contracted position, the flexible cable 186 moves relative to the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164. The flexible cable 186 can be smoothly moved while preventing the floating.

  In addition, the gears 169A to 169E are installed on the left side with the width direction central axis of the rear movable base 163 interposed therebetween, and the flexible cable 186 is arranged in the width direction central axis of the rear side movable base 163. It is arrange | positioned on the right side which is the other side on both sides.

  Accordingly, the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164 can be moved to the relatively extended position and the relatively contracted position while preventing the flexible cable 186 from interfering with the gears 169A to 169E. it can. As a result, the flexible cable 186 can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, when the protruding portion 198 is provided on the fixed base 162 and the upper movable effect member 101A is in the standby position, the flexible cable 186 is connected to the fixed base 162 and the rear side. It is bent and accommodated between the movable base 163 and between the rear movable base 163 and the front movable base 164, and is bent by being pressed against the protrusion 198.

  As a result, the flexible cable 186 that is bent and accommodated in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 can be further bent by the protruding portion 198.

  Therefore, the length of the flexible cable 186 accommodated in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 is increased to increase the length of the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186. The flexible cable 186 is prevented from flapping inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164, and the flexible cable 186 is fixed to the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base. The base 164 can be stably accommodated.

  Furthermore, the flexible cable 186 is further bent by the projecting portion 198, whereby a restoring force for returning the flexible cable 186 from the bent state can be generated. For this reason, the frictional force generated between the flexible cable 186 and the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to more effectively prevent the flexible cable 186 from flapping inside the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base 164. The flexible cable 186 can be prevented from moving in the fixed base 162, the rear movable base 163, and the front movable base. The base 164 can be stored more stably.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the upper movable effect member 101A includes a case 161, a flexible cable 186 provided on the case 161, and a relay board 185 connected to the flexible cable 186.
The case 161 includes a guide groove 187 into which the flexible cable 186 is fitted, and a guide groove 188 that extends in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and into which the flexible cable 186 is fitted. Yes. The guide groove 187 and the guide groove 188 are formed in an L shape and communicate with each other.

  The guide groove 187 has a bottom surface 187c inclined downward from one end portion 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position of the relay substrate 185 and the flexible cable 186 toward the other end portion 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. The flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by a fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other. .

  Thereby, the flexible cable 186 fitted into the guide groove 187 can be extended to the guide groove 188 along the inclined bottom surface 187c of the guide groove 187. For this reason, as compared with the case where the inclination of the end portion 187a in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 located at the connection position of the flexible cable 186 and the relay substrate 185 is steep (for example, a step having a 90 ° inclination), it is flexible. It is possible to prevent the cable 186 from being bent. Therefore, it is possible to protect the flexible cable 186 by preventing a load from being applied to the connection position between the flexible cable 186 and the relay substrate 185.

  Further, the flexible cable 186 is fastened to the case 161 by the fastening member 189 at a position where the other end 187b in the extending direction of the guide groove 187 and the one end 188a in the extending direction of the guide groove 188 communicate with each other. It is possible to prevent the flexible cable 186 from flapping at a bent position where the guide groove 187 and the guide groove 188 communicate with each other.

  The bottom surface 187c of the guide groove 187 is upward from the one end 187a in the extending direction located at the connection position of the relay substrate 185 and the flexible cable 186 toward the other end 187b in the extending direction communicating with the guide groove 188. It may be inclined to.

  Here, merging can mean completion, appearance, gimmick driving, etc. of a player by forming a specific design by contacting, approaching, and interlocking with game members. It represents performing a production or the like.

  In particular, when performing an effect involving such a combination, it may indicate that the jackpot is announced or that the degree of expectation of the jackpot (the probability or reliability that the jackpot will be hit when the corresponding effect is executed) is large. It is conceivable that the appearance of a specific design can improve the interest of the player in the gaming machine and the effect of improving expectation for the game itself.

  In addition, the usage is not limited to this, pseudo ream, reach, special role, small hit, BB, RB, reel lock, pseudo bonus, RT (replay time), AT (assist time), ART (assist It is assumed that it is used for various notifications such as replay time, CT (chance time), and CZ (chance zone).

  In addition, this embodiment can be used with a pachislot machine, a pachinko machine, an enclosed game machine, and the like. As a game medium, in addition to a ball and a medal, the number of game media on the data (a possession ball, an outgoing ball, a rental ball) , Storage balls, credits, number of inputs, number of fires, number of payouts, number of foul balls, etc.) and various gaming media are assumed. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the number of game media on data increases or decreases. In addition, the possession ball, the outgoing ball, the rental ball, and the storage ball can be applied to various game media such as a ball and a medal. Further, the out number of gaming machines may be counted using an out box or other peripheral device.

<Configuration and operation of left movable effect member 271 and right movable effect member 272>
As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a left movable effect member 271 and a right movable effect member 272. The left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272 are provided on the left and right sides of the game board 1 with the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 interposed therebetween.

  As shown in FIG. 121, the left movable effect member 271 includes an upper cover 273 fixed at the rear of the game board 1, and the left sword member 274 is swingable on the swing shaft 273 </ b> A of the upper cover 273. Installed.

  The left sword member 274 is a member imitating a sword that extends in the vertical direction. An arm portion 275 is integrally provided on the upper portion of the left sword member 274, and the arm portion 275 is formed with a slit 275A extending in the left-right direction.

  A motor 276 is attached to the upper cover 273, and a motor gear 276 </ b> A is provided on the shaft of the motor 276. Gears 277A, 277B, and 277C are rotatably provided on the upper cover 273, and the gear 277A meshes with the motor gear 276A. The motor gear 277C is integrally provided with a fitting protrusion 277c, and the fitting protrusion 277c is slidably fitted into the slit 275A.

  The right movable effect member 272 includes a lower cover 278 fixed at the rear of the game board 1, and a right sword member 279 is swingably attached to a swing shaft 278A of the lower cover 278.

  The right sword member 279 is a member imitating a sword that extends in the vertical direction. An arm portion 280 is integrally provided at a lower portion of the right sword member 279, and a slit 280A extending in the left-right direction is formed in the arm portion 280.

A motor 281 is attached to the lower cover 278, and a motor gear 281A is provided on the shaft of the motor 281. Gears 282A and 282B are rotatably provided on the lower cover 278, and the gear 282A meshes with the motor gear 281A.
The motor gear 282B is integrally provided with a fitting protrusion 282b, and the fitting protrusion 282b is slidably fitted into the slit 280A.

Next, operations of the left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272 will be described.
In the state where the left movable effect member 271 is located at the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 3), the left sword member 274 extends in the vertical direction. When the motor 276 rotates forward in the clockwise direction from the state in which the left movable effect member 271 is positioned at the standby position, the rotation of the motor gear 276A is transmitted to the gear 277C via the gears 277A and 277B, and the gear 277C rotates counterclockwise. Rotate to. When the gear 277C rotates counterclockwise, the fitting protrusion 277c moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 277C along the slit 275A.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 122, the left sword member 274 swings counterclockwise from the standby position, and moves to an unfolded position inclined obliquely in the display area 4A.

  On the other hand, in the state where the right movable effect member 272 is located at the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 3), the right sword member 279 extends in the vertical direction. When the motor 281 is rotated forward in the counterclockwise direction from the state in which the right movable effect member 272 is located at the standby position, the rotation of the motor gear 281A is transmitted to the gear 282B via the gear 282A, and the gear 282B is rotated in the counterclockwise direction. Rotate. When the gear 282B rotates counterclockwise, the fitting protrusion 282b moves along the slit 280A in the circumferential direction of the gear 282B.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 122, the right sword member 279 swings counterclockwise from the standby position and moves to the development position inclined obliquely in the display area 4A. For example, the left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272 are simultaneously moved from the standby position to the deployed position and are connected in an oblique direction at the deployed position.

  On the other hand, in the left sword member 274, when the motor 276 rotates counterclockwise from the deployed state, the rotation of the motor gear 276A is transmitted to the gear 277C via the gears 277A and 277B, and the gear 277C rotates in the clockwise direction. To do. When the gear 277C rotates in the clockwise direction, the fitting protrusion 277c moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 277C along the slit 275A. As a result, the left sword member 274 swings in the clockwise direction from the deployed position, retracts from the display area 4A, and returns to the state of extending vertically in the standby position.

  In the right sword member 272, when the motor 281 rotates in the clockwise direction from the deployed state, the rotation of the motor gear 281A is transmitted to the gear 282B through the gear 282A, and the gear 282B rotates in the clockwise direction. When the gear 282B rotates in the clockwise direction, the fitting protrusion 282b moves in the circumferential direction of the gear 282B along the slit 280A. As a result, the right sword member 279 swings in the clockwise direction from the deployed position, retracts from the display area 4A, and returns to the state of extending vertically in the standby position.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, examples of other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 127.

  123 to 127 are diagrams showing another embodiment of the game board 1. In FIG. 123, on the right side of the game area 1p of the game board 1, there are a passing gate 251, a second start port 252, a blade member 253, a first grand prize port 254, a second grand prize port 255, and a first grand prize port 254. Are provided with a first big prize opening shutter 254A for opening and closing, a second big prize opening shutter 255A for opening and closing the second big prize opening 255, and a general winning opening 40D.

  The passage gate 251 provides an opportunity to open the second start port 252. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 251 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins the passing gate 251, no winning ball is generated.

  The first grand prize opening shutter 254A switches the first big prize opening 254 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing the game board 1 so as to be tilted forward and backward in the front-back direction of the game board 1. It arrange | positions so that the 1st big winning opening 254 may be covered in a closed state.

  The second grand prize opening shutter 255A opens and closes the game board 1 so as to be tilted forward and backward in the front-rear direction, thereby switching the second big prize opening 255 to an open state or a closed state. It arrange | positions so that the 2nd big winning opening 255 may be covered in a closed state.

  The first big prize opening shutter 254A and the second big prize opening shutter 255A are driven by a first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A and a second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6), respectively.

  The game board 1 is provided with a ball passage unit 256 shown in FIGS. 124 and 125. The ball passage unit 256 is located below the passing gate 251 (indicated by the phantom line in FIG. 125), and the outlet 257 from which the game ball won in the second starting port 252 (indicated by the phantom line in FIG. 125) is discharged. And a ball passage 258 that communicates with the discharge port 257 and extends downward from the discharge port 257 and discharges the game ball discharged from the discharge port 257 downstream.

  An opening 259 that opens to the side of the game board 1 is formed at the upper right of the discharge port 257, and the opening 259 communicates with the game area 1p.

  The second starting port 252 is determined to be difficult to win by a blade member 253 as a normal electric accessory, and the winning of the game ball of the second starting port 252 is determined by the second starting port switch 330 (FIG. 6).

  The blade member 253 moves in the front-rear direction so as to project and retract in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and has an open state that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start port 252, 2 It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to win a game ball at the start opening 252. The blade member 253 is driven by a blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  When the blade member 253 is in the open state, the game ball that passes through the passage gate 251 wins the second start port 252, and when the blade member 253 is in the closed state, the game ball that passes through the passage gate 251 2 After contacting the blade member 253 without winning the start opening 252, it is discharged to the game area 1 p through the opening 259.

  The ball passage unit 256 is provided with a discharge port 260, and a game ball won in the general winning port 40 </ b> D is discharged to the ball passage 258 through the discharge port 260.

  A ball passage 259 communicates with the lower end of the ball passage 258, and the ball passage 259 extends in the left-right direction of the game board 1 from the lower end of the ball passage 258. The ball passage 258 and the ball passage 259 are formed so that the passage area, which is a cross-sectional area in the front-rear direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball passes, is about two or more game balls. Thereby, the game balls can pass side by side in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 in the ball passages 258 and 259.

  A general winning opening right switch 400B is provided in the ball passage 258 below the discharge opening 260, and the general winning opening right switch 400B detects a game ball that has been won by the general winning opening 40D and discharged to the discharge opening 260. To do.

  The ball passage unit 256 includes a ball passage 262. The ball passage 262 is located below the first grand prize opening 254, and the game balls won in the first big prize opening 254 are discharged into the ball passage 262.

  In FIG. 126, a spherical passage 263 communicates with a lower portion (downstream) of the spherical passage 262. 124 to 126, the ball passage 263 is located above the ball passage 259, and extends in the left-right direction of the game board 1 together with the ball passage 259.

  As a result, the game ball won from the first grand prize opening 254 is discharged to the ball passage 263 through the ball passage 262 and discharged toward the left (downstream) of the game board 1 along the ball passage 263.

  125 and 126, the ball passage unit 256 includes a ball passage 264. The ball passage 264 is located below the second grand prize opening 255, and the game balls won in the second big prize opening 255 are discharged into the ball passage 264.

  In FIG. 127, a spherical passage 259 and a spherical passage 263 communicate with the spherical passage 264. For this reason, the game ball that has won the first grand prize opening 254 passes through the ball passage 263 and is discharged toward the left (downstream) of the game board 1, and the ball passage 264 in the middle of the ball passage 263. And discharged to the ball passage 259.

  124 and 125, the downstream end of the ball passage 259 and the downstream end of the ball passage 263 are joined by the joining portion 265, and the game balls discharged downstream along the ball passage 259 or the ball passage 263 are Are merged at the merge unit 265 and discharged to the back surface of the game board 1. In other words, the ball passage 259 and the ball passage 263 discharge the game balls that have won the first grand prize opening 254 and the second big prize opening 255 to the back of the game board 1.

  In addition, since the ball passage 259 communicates with the ball passage 258, the game balls that have won the second starting port 252 and the general winning port 40D are discharged from the ball passage 258 through the ball passage 259 to the joining portion 265. In other words, game balls discharged to the ball passage 258 and the ball passage 263 can be discharged to the ball passage 259.

  Here, the first grand prize opening 254 of the present embodiment constitutes the first prize opening of the present invention, and the second big prize opening 255 constitutes the second prize opening of the present invention. The ball passage 263 constitutes the first game medium passage of the present invention, and the ball passage 259 constitutes the second game medium passage of the present invention.

  The ball passage 259 of the present embodiment has a passage area which is an area of a cross section (the front-back direction of the game board 1) perpendicular to the direction (the left-right direction of the game board 1) through which the game ball passes than the ball passage 263. Largely formed.

  In addition, the ball passage 263 communicates with the ball passage 264 separately from the junction 265. As a result, the game ball that has won the first grand prize opening 254 can be discharged to the ball passage 259 via the ball passage 264.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ball passage 259 has an area of a cross section perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball passes by joining the ball passage 263 downstream of the second big prize opening 255. The passage area is formed larger than the passage area of the spherical passage 263, and the spherical passage 264 is provided as a communicating portion communicating with the spherical passage 263 separately from the joining portion 265 that is a joining portion with the spherical passage 263. In addition, since the game balls won in the first big winning opening 254 can be discharged to the ball passage 259 via the ball passage 264, the gaming balls won in the first big winning opening 254 are clogged downstream. Can be prevented. As a result, the game balls can be discharged smoothly toward the downstream, and the game performance can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, two large winning openings 254 and 255 are provided, but three or more winning openings may be provided. In addition, although two ball passages 259 and 263 are provided, three or more ball passages may be provided corresponding to the number of winning prize openings. Note that the game medium passage only needs to be able to guide or discharge the game medium from the winning opening, and may be provided in a game board, a spacer, or the like.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 128, an upper movable effect member 101A is installed behind the decorative member 99 (see FIG. 3), and a lens 289 is installed on the right side of the upper movable effect member 101A. An electrical decoration board 290 is installed behind the lens 289. The electrical decoration substrate 290 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 291 that emit light in a single color (for example, white). The LED 291 emits light toward the decorative member 99 through the lens 289. Here, the LEDs 291 are included in the LED group 28 (see FIG. 6) controlled by the lamp control circuit 78.

  The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a, which are full-color light emitters of the present embodiment, constitute the first light emitting part of the present invention, and the LED 291 that is a monochromatic light emitter constitutes the second light emitting part. The front decoration 160 including the blue lens member constitutes the lens member of the present invention.

Next, the operation will be described.
In a state where the upper movable effect member 101A is positioned at the standby position, light is emitted so as to match the light emission mode with the monochromatic LED 291. Specifically, since the front decoration 160 is blue, light is emitted in green so that the color transmitted from the front decoration 160 is white.

  As a result, the colors emitted from the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a are similar to those of the LED 291, and the decorative member 99 emits white light. Here, it is conceivable that the decorative member 99 emits light in dark white when green light is superimposed on the blue front decoration 160. In this case, the lens of the decorative member 99 or the lens of the decorative member 99 is used. By providing a diffusion sheet or the like in the vicinity, the light from the upper movable effect member 101A and the light from the LED 219 can be diffused into the decorative member 99, and the light emission mode of the decorative member 99 can be adjusted.

  Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A moves from the standby position to the movable position, the decoration member 99 emits light by the LED 291 and the upper movable effect member 101A emits light in a color different from that of the LED 291 so that the upper movable effect member 101A. The performance by can be improved more effectively.

  Further, when the upper movable effect member 101A is controlled to emit light according to the expectation level of the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 4, or when the LED 291 emits white light according to the expectation level of the effect, The LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a may be controlled to emit light so that the upper movable effect member 101A looks the same color at the movable position.

  Thus, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a emit light in a state where the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the standby position, so that the LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a visually recognized from the front. Since the color of 195a can be changed to a color similar to the light emission color of the LED 291, it is unnecessary to provide a light emitting unit such as an LED on the decoration member 99, and the decoration member 99 is emitted by the upper movable effect member 101 </ b> A. it can.

  In addition, the mounting amount of full-color LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a can be reduced, and the decorative member 99 can emit light of the same color (white). As a result, the configuration of the decorative member 99 can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member 99 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the upper movable effect member 101A is located at the movable position from the standby position, the color of the decorative member 99 viewed from the front of the decorative member 99 can be changed. The effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be improved.

  Further, for example, if an effect of moving the upper movable effect member 101A from the standby position to the movable position while emitting light, the upper movable effect member 101A that moves while emitting the player's line of sight can be noted. Thereby, the effect of the upper movable effect member 101A can be made to stand out.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the non-probability / non-short-time gaming state and the special symbol lottery winning probability are not set as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later. There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming state) that is higher than the probability variation / non-short-time gaming state, and a time-short gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability / non-time-short gaming state. When the special symbol lottery is won, the game shifts to a big hit game state (specific game state).

  In the short-time gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is in a high probability state, so that the winning to the second starting port 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric projectile. This state is a so-called “electric support”, and it becomes easy to store a reserved ball of a special symbol game, which will be described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game ball by winning the second start opening 33. Specifically, the short-time gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-short gaming state 1), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (short-time gaming state 2). ), Which means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long (time-short game state 3). For example, the short-time gaming state includes a state in which the short-time gaming state 1, the short-time gaming state 2, and the short-time gaming state 3 proceed simultaneously with any combination. In such a short time gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved.

  In the big hit gaming state, after the big hit gaming state that has succeeded in winning the V prize in the specific area 38A, the player must make a transition to the probability change / short time gaming state (the normal change state in which the probability changing gaming state is in the short time gaming state). The probabilistic / non-time-saving gaming state (the non-probability-changing gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, ie, the normal gaming state) is not changed. On the other hand, if the big hit gaming state is completed without a V winning in the specific area 38A without succeeding in the non-V winning, the normal gaming state that is the non-probability variable gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the big winning gaming state ends. It is supposed to move to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state is over, for example, when the special symbol lottery (180 special symbol variation display or stop display) is performed 180 times in the probability variation / short time gaming state, It shifts to the probabilistic and non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, 100 times or 4 times of special symbol lottery (100 times or 4 times of special symbol variation display or stop display) was performed in the non-probability change and short-time gaming state , It is designed to shift to a non-probabilistic and non-time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the probabilistic / short-time gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries as in the present embodiment is also referred to as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B are installed in a state of being retracted from the center of the display area 4A behind the game board 1 when not in operation (see FIG. 3). The upper movable effect member 101A appears at the front movable position (see FIGS. 19 and 48) in the center of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and the upper left blade member 172 and the upper right blade member 173. The left lower blade member 174 and the right lower blade member 175 move and emit light. The lower movable effect member 101B appears at a movable position in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and moves and emits the outer ring member 117 in the radial direction. Further, the lower movable effect member 101B moves and emits the outer ring member 117 in the radial direction at the standby position below the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed.

  The cover member 43 is provided to form the second big prize opening 37 and is attached below the first big prize opening 36. The cover member 43 forms a second big prize opening 37 by opening a part of its upper end surface. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the second big prize opening 37. Further, a guide piece 43 a for guiding the game ball toward the second big prize opening 37 is provided at the front edge of the upper end surface of the cover member 43. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second big prize opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B through the second big prize opening count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is disposed so as to cover the second grand prize opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

  The LED unit 5 informs the player of each gaming state and the lottery result. As shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2 has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 or the like includes a lamp corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the normal transition to the big hit gaming state is confirmed. Lights (or flashes) when a special character (hereinafter, also referred to as “SP character”) appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in a part when the special symbol changes in the gaming state or in the big hit gaming state. It is like that.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33 by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory when the game ball wins the passing gate 35. The lottery result for “game” is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be turned on in red and blue, for example. In the normal symbol game, the LED lamp 511 is lit in red when winning, while it is lit in blue when lost in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is allowed. In addition, other lighting modes may be used as the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, for example, the lighting state or the blinking state in the case of winning, and the lighting state in the case of losing. It may be.

  In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing a variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524. In this case, the number of times that the normal symbol variation display that has been put on hold for performing the variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time onward is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are positioned on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524, for example, when the hold number is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, and 524 are turned off. When the number of holdings is “2”, the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is “3”, the LED lamps 521, 522, and 523 are turned on, and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holds is “4”, all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, and 524 are lit.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the “special symbol game” and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “first special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the first starting port 32, and the first The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 32 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol serving as identification information (hereinafter referred to as “second special symbol”) in response to the winning of a game ball at the second starting port 33, and the second The winning lottery result based on the winning at the start port 33 is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize identification information display means.

  The variation display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED and the like, and each segment individually turning on and off. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the first special symbol and the plurality of winning symbols displayed with the second special symbol are different from each other. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the big hit gaming state, such as “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state can be made after the jackpot gaming state ends. There are nominal jackpot symbols and nominal jackpot symbols such as “time-short 1” to “time-short 5” indicating that the jackpot game state is indeterminate and shifts to the short-time game state (see FIG. 50). The winning symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and there is a nominal jackpot symbol such as “probable variation 1” indicating that the jackpot gaming state can be shifted to after the jackpot gaming state ends. Yes (see FIG. 50). In other words, the winning symbol of the first special symbol has a big winning symbol indicating that it shifts to the short-time gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, but the winning symbol of the second special symbol has the short-time gaming state after the end of the big winning gaming state. There is no jackpot symbol indicating that it will shift to. The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to 7-segment LEDs or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554. When the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, and 554 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the first starting port 32, the first special symbol for the next special symbol game is displayed. The number of times the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the screen can be executed (the number of hold) is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564. When the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, and 564 are turned on or off, the first special symbol display unit 53 is displayed. Or, when the second special symbol display unit 54 displays a variation of the symbol for the special symbol game, when a new game ball is won at the second starting port 33, it is reserved for the symbol variation display for the special symbol game after the next time. In addition, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (the number of suspensions) is displayed. Each of the 1st special symbol reservation display part 55 and the 2nd special symbol reservation display part 56 is arranged side by side up and down, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display part 52. The display mode of the number of holds in the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the hold number by the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are moved to the first start port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. A game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 that has been suspended The symbol variation display is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the second special symbol display unit 54. 2 The number of variable display suspensions of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of a game ball at the start port 33 is four at the maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is the main RAM 63 (FIG. 6) is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (0) as the start memory (start memory information), and the information of the four first special symbol games that are held is stored in the first special symbol start memory area ( 1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), which is stored as the start storage. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area ( 0) is stored as a start memory (start memory information), and the information of the second special symbol game for four times held is the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4). ) Is stored as the start memory. Accordingly, the total number of winning holds in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 The winning suspension to the first starting port 32 and the winning suspension to the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

  The round display section 59 is lit while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games to be described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “16R”), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when setting a big hit gaming state with a number of rounds different from the number of rounds described above, the LED lamp 592 or 593 is turned on and the other LED lamps are turned off. Can do. Note that the number of rounds (number of times) may mean the total number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or may indicate the number of orders indicating the order in which round games are executed sequentially. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, “16 rounds” or “16R” is written, and when the latter is meant, for example, “16th round” is written. In the following description, “round game” may be simply referred to as “round”.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged at the approximate center so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of winning lottery based on winning of game balls to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images relating to the game, for example, an identification pattern for performance, an effect image in the normal game state, an effect in the big hit game state An image, a demonstration image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the variation of the identification information on condition that the game ball has won the first start port 32 or the second start port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 constitute effect production means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect execution means are also used as notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable / writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 includes a specific gaming state transition determination unit (a first specific gaming state transition determination unit and a second specific gaming state transition determination unit), a specific gaming state control unit, and a special gaming state control unit. , And round game execution means (first round game execution means and second round game execution means).

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start port switch 320 disposed behind the first start port 32. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330 receive a predetermined detection signal as a winning when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33. This is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected with a pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35. When a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 350, a normal symbol lottery is performed on the assumption that the game ball has won the pass gate 35. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 51, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may make it do.

  The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. Thereby, the pass gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a general winning port left switch 400A disposed behind the general winning ports 40A, 40B, and 40C located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 and a general winning port disposed behind the general winning port 40D. The mouth right switch 400B is connected. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a predetermined number of winning balls are played by the payout device 83.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first grand prize winning port count switch 360 disposed in the back of the first big prize winning port 36. The first grand prize opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the first big prize opening 36. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the first big winning port count switch 360, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 or the lower plate 17 or lower Dispensing to the plate 18.

  Connected to the main control circuit 60 is a second grand prize winning count switch 370 disposed behind the second big prize winning opening 37. The second grand prize opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the second big prize opening 37. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the second big winning port count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21, and the upper plate 17 Alternatively, payout to the lower plate 18 is performed.

  The first grand prize port count switch 360 and the second grand prize port count switch 370 mainly control predetermined detection signals when a game ball passes through the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37. Supply to circuit 60.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that V is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a non-V winning is made when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A for driving the first big prize opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first big prize opening 36, and a second big prize opening shutter for opening and closing the second big prize opening 37. The second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A for driving 37A is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first big prize opening 36 and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult. In a situation where the first grand prize opening 36 is at least closed, the second big prize opening shutter 37A is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second big prize opening 37, and the game ball is awarded. Is driven into an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 by the first big prize opening shutter 36A and the second big prize opening shutter 37A is performed by the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display. This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the unit 54 and is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 51 in the predetermined light emission mode, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second start port 33. It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the normal symbol hit probability is 0 in a game state that is not a short-time game state (in this embodiment, “non-probability change / non-short-time game state”) (for example, lottery The non-winning is determined), and the blade member 34 is not opened. On the other hand, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the high probability state (short-time gaming state) is, for example, 1/1 (for example, winning is determined without lottery). Open 3 times for 3 seconds.

  The main control circuit 60 controls the displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. As a result, when the round game, which will be described later, is being executed in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed state even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 38A or difficult, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 displays the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 when the game ball is detected by the first start port 320 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed. The first one based on the winning of a game ball at the first start port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 The number of the special symbol variable display execution (start) is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the first special symbol that has been reserved as the number of the reserved symbols relating to the first special symbol is started.

  When the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol hold display unit 56, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 330, the second special symbol hold display unit 56 The second based on the winning of a game ball at the second start port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of suspension (execution) of the special symbol variation display (ie, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol) is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, the corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning.

  In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set for the number of suspensions in which the execution of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 places the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 in the upper limit. When the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of the variable display hold numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 each. (That is, up to 4 detection times), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the number of holdings. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable symbol display, the number of holdings is again added up to four.

  When the number of first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63. One special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games corresponding to four holding numbers is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, in the case of the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of the second special symbol game held is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings is 4 in the main RAM 63. 2 are sequentially stored as starting memories in the special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4).

  Therefore, the total number of game balls held in the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is 8 in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 54 and the second special symbol are displayed. The number of hold displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display section 55 is also four.

  In the open state of the first big prize opening 36 by the first big prize opening shutter 36A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the first big prize opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, nine winning numbers). Or, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as a predetermined later-described opening time elapses is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first big prize opening shutter 36A has elapsed, the first big prize opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first big prize opening 36. Is done.

  Similarly, in the open state of the second big prize opening 37 by the second big prize opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second big prize opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, nine winning numbers). Or until a later-described opening time specified in advance is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big prize opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second big prize opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second big prize opening 37. Is done.

  In the big hit gaming state, the open state and the closed state of the first big winning port 36 and the second big winning port 37 are repeated based on a preset big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, each of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 is in an open state and a closed state for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on a big prize opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called “round game”. A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first grand prize port 36 or the second grand prize port 37 is closed by one round game, the first grand prize port 36 or the second grand prize port 37 is opened as the next round game. These states are also referred to as “inter-round game”, “inter-round interval”, or simply “interval”. In one round game, each of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 may be opened and closed several times. In one round game, the opening / closing states of the first grand prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 are exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big prize opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big prize opening is continuously closed.

  The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is not provided with a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from the big hit gaming state, but may be provided with a small hit gaming state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game. For example, the second big winning opening 37 is defined to be opened only once. However, when providing a small hit game state, it is possible to control an arbitrary or specific special winning opening to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. In addition, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state may be shifted to a gaming state different from the gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state, and the gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state It is good also as returning to.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with respect to “round” with numbers such as 1 round or 1st round, for example, 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc., simply “R In a single round game, before the first grand prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times, the maximum number of winnings per round is reached. When it has been reached, the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37 are closed, and the first grand prize port 36 and the second grand prize port 37 are not opened for the remaining number of times of opening. The round game is ended.

  In a specific round game in which the second big prize opening 37 is opened in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. Thus, the specific area 38A is in an open state and a closed state in a specific round game in the big hit game state. In other words, in a specific round game, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and become a V prize, while in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball is temporarily won in the second big prize opening 37. Even if it does, it will be in the state where a game ball cannot pass through the specific area 38A, or is difficult. That is, the types of jackpot game state (specific game state) include a jackpot game state including a specific round game (first specific game state) and a jackpot game state not including a specific round game (second specific game state). There is.

  In the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made up of numbers, except for specific cases, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to know that it is a “hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, in any one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to “big hit” that can be obtained by many balls. When the display is stopped, the combination of effects decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is a specific display mode (for example, a state where all the same symbols are arranged in each of a plurality of symbol rows) In addition, an effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The main CPU 61 included in the main control circuit 60 is in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the first starting area (first starting port 32). It functions as a first specific gaming state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second starting area (second starting port 33). It functions as a second specific gaming state transition determination means.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 controls the gaming state to the specific gaming state on the condition that the first or second specific gaming state transition determination unit obtains a determination result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state. Function as.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 determines that the specific game state transition determination unit shifts to the specific game state after the specific game state is completed on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state. It functions as a special game state control means for controlling to a special game state (probability game state) that is relatively easy to obtain.

  Further, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (first big prize opening shutter 36A) to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific gaming state. It functions as first round game execution means for executing (game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as the first round game execution means can perform control to change the first variable winning device to the first mode and the second mode during execution of at least one first round game.

  Further, the main CPU 61 changes the second variable winning device (second big prize opening shutter 37A) to the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific game state. It functions as a second round game execution means for executing (game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as the second round game execution means is a specific round game mode in which it is relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the second variable winning device to the specific area 38A during the execution of at least one second round game. It is possible to perform a specific second round game in which control is performed to vary the first mode and the second mode. In addition, during execution of at least one other round game, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in a predetermined round game mode in which it is relatively difficult to pass the game medium to the specific area 38A. It is also possible to perform control.

  In the big hit game state, after the first specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means, at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. A first specific game state, and a second specific game state in which a specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after the first round game execution means has executed a first specific number of times of the first round game; After the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means, the second specific number of times of the first round game is executed which is greater than the first specific number of times, and then at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. After the three specific game states and the first round game are executed by the second round game execution means, the second round game execution means Realizes a specific game state including a fourth specific game state the round game is not executed, the.

  A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes to be described later, including the functions of each means of the main CPU 61 described above.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, other readable / writable storage media can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when power is cut off.

  Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal plate 80. .

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall, or a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots. For data communication.

  The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a pass gate switch 350, a first big prize port count switch 360, and a second big prize port count switch 370. , A specific area switch 380A, a non-specific area switch 380B, a general winning opening left switch 400A, a general winning opening right switch 400B, and a backup clear switch 81 are included.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears backup data of the main control circuit 60 and a payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation of the hall manager.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / firing control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and is connected to the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84. In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving means.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal for requesting lending of game balls in accordance with a player's operation, and signals can be transmitted to and received from the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the first starting port 32, and one game ball as the number of prize balls per winning prize to the second starting port 33. 10 game balls as the number of winning balls per winning prize in the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D, and per winning prize in the first winning prize opening 36 or the second winning prize opening 37 14 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the shooting handle 26b of the shooting device 26 is gripped by the player and rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power, and the game ball is controlled to be launched toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes a timer interrupt process as an interrupt process even during execution of a main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed in response to an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60 and is configured to be supplied with commands from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. A circuit 76, a sound control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79; The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the audio control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 includes a motor (motor 110A, motor 166) that drives the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B, a motor (motor 276) that drives the left movable effect member 271 and the right movable effect member 272. In addition, a movable effect device 42 having a motor 281) and a mechanism is connected.

  The sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a push-down button switch 90A provided on the push-down button 9A and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B. The push operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as display means, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c function as music output means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 realizes a display control means, a prior notification means, a scheduled provision quantity determination means, a notification quantity change means, and an effect pattern selection means. The program ROM 72 and the word RAM 73 implement storage means. The production pattern selection means includes music pattern selection means.

  In the specific game state, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays at least a part of the number of round games executed by the first round game execution means and the second round game execution means with a round number notification image (for example, an icon indicating the number of rounds). ) Function as display means capable of displaying. The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

  The sub CPU 71 executes a predetermined game state (a round game for changing the first big prize opening 36 to the open mode and the closed mode is executed a plurality of times and opens the second big game port 37 by the specific game state transition determination means. The specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means on the condition that it is determined that the round game changing to the mode and the closed mode is shifted to the jackpot game state in which the game is executed at least once. Before, it functions as a prior notification means capable of executing prior notification for notifying that the specific second round game is executed. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit capable of displaying a round number notification image based on the execution time of the prior notification by the prior notification unit.

  In the specific gaming state, the sub CPU 71 determines the number of substantial round games (a round game that facilitates winning to the first big prize opening 36) executed by the first round game execution means (main CPU 61), and the actual round. The upper limit number of game media accepted (first upper prize number) to the first variable prize device (first big prize opening 36) defined for the number of times of the game, and the acceptance of game media to the first variable prize device It is executed by the second round game execution means (main CPU 61) and the number of game values (game balls) given by the game value giving means (payout device 83) per number (winning number). The number of real round games (round game that makes it easy to win the second big prize opening 37) and the second variable prize device (the first variable game device) defined for the number of real round games one time An upper limit number of game media to be received in the big winning opening 37) (upper limit number of winnings), a number of game values to be given by the game value giving means per one number of game media to be accepted to the second variable prize winning device, It functions as a scheduled grant quantity determining means for determining the scheduled grant quantity of the game value based on the above.

  Further, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as an informing unit capable of informing a part of the scheduled amount determined by the scheduled amount determining unit, and the sub CPU 71 determines the amount notified by the notifying unit as a schedule. It functions as a notification quantity changing means that can be changed within the range of the scheduled assigned quantity determined by the assigned quantity determining means.

  The sub CPU 71 functions as an effect pattern selection means that can select an effect pattern according to the type of the specific game state (big hit game state). The liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 Based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means, it functions as an effect execution means capable of executing an effect in the specific gaming state.

  The sub CPU 71 has a plurality of music patterns (for example, a music pattern A (success), a music pattern A (reverse), a music pattern A (failure), a music pattern B (success), and a music pattern in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). B (reverse), music pattern B (failure), music pattern C (determined)) function as music pattern selection means for selecting music patterns, and the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c are selected by the music pattern selection means. It functions as music output means for outputting music corresponding to the selected music pattern in the special game state.

  The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute an item prefetching effect (item effect), which will be described later, determines an effect content in the item prefetching effect (item effect), and controls the progress of the item prefetching effect (item effect). It functions as an effect control means, an item advance notification determining means for determining whether or not to perform an advance notification effect to be described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 are an item pre-reading effect (item effect) ) And an item effect executing means for executing a prior notification effect.

  The sub CPU 71 functions as a story effect control means for controlling the progress of a series of story effects and related story effects, which will be described later, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and the lamp / LED 27, It functions as a story production execution means for executing a related story production.

  A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by quickly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. For example, the display control circuit 76 generates an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. The image data ROM is configured to store data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores image data to be displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 77 is for controlling sound (sound, music, etc.) output from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c. For example, a sound source IC for controlling sound, sound data for storing various sound data ROM and an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying sound signals are included. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. In response to the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71, the sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. Sound data can be selected.

  The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and outputs sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 sets the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B to the standby positions (by the operation of the push-down operation button 9A during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9). The production operation such as moving to a movable position (see FIGS. 19 and 48) is controlled.

[Game state and production mode of gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the gaming state and effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Note that the gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a normal mode, a time reduction mode, and an ST mode are implemented as performance modes in the normal gaming state. In the short-time mode, as a production, the short-time mode that impresses that the short-time mode has a relatively small number of games (the number of special symbol fluctuations, that is, the number of special symbol games) and the short-time mode are relatively many. There is a long mode that impresses you that it will be the number of games. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a SP bonus that is being played per first special symbol as a production mode in the big hit gaming state, that is during a live bonus, a story bonus, a battle bonus, and a second special symbol. Has been implemented.

  The normal mode is an effect mode of non-probable and non-time-saving gaming state. The normal mode is an effect mode in which the user stays when the mode is not the time reduction mode, the ST mode, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol. For example, when the special symbol game of 4 times (short mode) or 100 times (long mode) is consumed in the time reduction mode, the mode is changed from the time reduction mode to the normal mode. Further, in the ST mode, when the special symbol game of 180 times (specified number of times) is consumed, the ST mode is shifted to the normal mode. Further, in the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, the live bonus and the story bonus that are in the middle of the first special symbol. Or move to Battle Bonus. In the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the second special symbol described above, the SP bonus that is in the middle of the second special symbol is displayed. May migrate.

  In addition, as a combination pattern of the decorative symbols in the normal mode, any combination pattern of “1” to “7” is stopped and displayed, but when the combination pattern of “7” is stopped and displayed. When the jackpot symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” of the first special symbol is determined and stopped as the combination mode “3”, “probability variation 1” of the first special symbol is displayed. ”To“ probability 6 ”, the expectation level corresponding to the big hit symbol is high, and when the combination of“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”, or“ 6 ”is stopped and displayed,“ probability 1 ”of the first special symbol is displayed. ”To“ Probability 6 ”, the degree of expectation that is a big hit symbol is low. When the combination mode of “1” or “5” is stopped and displayed, the degree of expectation that is a big hit symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” of the first special symbol is “2”. , “4”, or “6” is higher than the case where the stop mode is displayed, and “3” is lower than the case where the stop mode is displayed. However, as a combination pattern of decorative symbols in the normal mode, a combination pattern other than the combination pattern “7” may be stopped and displayed. As described above, when shifting to the SP bonus, which is during the second special symbol from the normal mode, the combination mode of “7” is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbol, and the second special symbol is displayed. The jackpot symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” is determined.

  The normal stage and the special stage in the normal mode are production stages that are elements that determine the production mode in a non-probable and non-short game state, the result of the jackpot determination is a predetermined result, and the special symbol game is a predetermined number of times. When the digestion has been completed, or when a transition condition such as the passage of a predetermined time is satisfied, the transition occurs. The decoration stage image data, the background image data, the frequency of effects, the appearance rate of specific effects, and the like can be made different between the normal stage and the special stage. With this configuration, it is intended to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game of the player who is playing the game in the normal mode.

  The short-time mode is an effect mode that is uncertain and short-time gaming state. In the time-saving mode, when the big hit symbol corresponding to the first special symbol “time reduction 1” to “time reduction 5” is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state, it corresponds to the big hit symbol of “time reduction 1” to “time reduction 5”. Executed after the big hit gaming state ends. For example, after the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbols corresponding to “Time Short 1” and “Time Short 5” is completed, until 100 special symbol games are basically consumed by being given 100 times as the number of games. Will continue. In addition, after the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot symbol corresponding to “Time Short 2” to “Time Short 4” is ended, four times as the number of games is basically granted until the special symbol game of four times is consumed. Will continue. In addition, even if the jackpot symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” of the first special symbol or “probability variation 1” of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is finally determined that a non-V prize is awarded. If it becomes, the mode shifts to the 100 time reduction mode, similarly to “time reduction 1” and “time reduction 5”. As described above, the time-saving mode is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state when a non-V winning is finally achieved in the jackpot gaming state.

  In the time reduction mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “7”, the effect mode shifts to the SP bonus, which is in the middle of the second special symbol. In the time reduction mode, the combination mode in which the decorative symbol is “7” is a jackpot symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” of the second special symbol. However, in the time-saving mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbols “1” to “6” may be stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol corresponding to the “special variation 1” of the second special symbol. Also, in the time-saving mode, when the special symbol game of 4 times or 100 times given as the number of games is consumed without stopping the big win symbol, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. In the time reduction mode, when a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, a bonus other than the SP bonus (in the middle of the first special symbol) Or a live bonus, a story bonus, or a battle bonus. In this case, the combination pattern other than “7” is stopped and displayed as the combination pattern of the decorative symbols, and the jackpot symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” or “time reduction 1” to “time reduction 5” of the first special symbol. It is shown that.

  The short mode of the short time mode is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression when the number of games to be given is four times, and even when the number of games is 100 times, the first time is the first time To be executed. The long mode of the short-time mode is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression when the number of games given is 100. When the number of games is, for example, the fourth time or more from the start of the short-time mode, the short mode May be executed with a production mode that gives an impression of promotion.

  The ST mode is a production mode with a promising and short-time gaming state, and is executed in conjunction with the transition of the gaming state to the probable gaming state (ST gaming state) after the end of the big win gaming state that has finally won a V prize. It is what is done. The ST mode is basically continued until 180 special symbol games are consumed by giving 180 times as the number of games, for example.

In the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the combination mode of “7”, the SP bonus, which is in the middle of the second special symbol, is transferred as in the time reduction mode. However, even in the ST mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbols “1” to “6” may be stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol corresponding to the “special variation 1” of the second special symbol. It is good also as changing the combination aspect of the decorative design stopped-displayed. For example, in one mode, the combination pattern with the decoration symbol “7” is made to correspond to the jackpot symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” of the second special symbol, and in the other mode, the decoration symbol is “1”. The combination mode of “7” may be made to correspond to the jackpot symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” of the second special symbol. Even in the ST mode, when a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the first special symbol described above, bonuses other than the SP bonus (per first special symbol) There are cases in which a transition is made to a live bonus, a story bonus, or a battle bonus. In this case, the combination pattern other than “7” is stopped and displayed as the combination pattern of the decorative symbols, and the jackpot symbol corresponding to “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6” or “time reduction 1” to “time reduction 5” of the first special symbol. It is shown that.

  The story section of the ST mode is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state when the V winning is finally won in the jackpot gaming state, and basically 51 special symbol games are consumed. Will continue until. In this story section, a series of story effects are executed over a total of 10 sets, with 5 games played as one set. Further, the remaining number of games is used to execute an effect (for example, title display) at the beginning of the series of stories at the beginning of the series of story effects to be executed. The series of story effects executed in the story section is a story that progresses even within the 50 games, and a story progresses every time it is executed in a series of story effects. A series of story productions proceed when the jackpot gaming state is a so-called “ream” in the ST mode.

  The ST mode battle reach section is executed after the end of the ST mode story section, and is basically continued until the end of the ST mode. In this battle reach section, an effect of displaying a battle scene of one character (for example, a friend character) and another character (for example, an enemy character) is executed, and it is determined to perform reach as the effect content. Then, a battle effect between the one character and the other character is executed, and the result of the jackpot determination is notified by displaying the winning or losing result. In addition, in this battle reach section, when it is decided to reach as the production content, the battle production will be performed regardless of the result of the big hit judgment (winning). Even if it is determined that the reach is determined, if the result of the big hit determination is lost, the progress of the story is prioritized and no special notification is performed. As described above, in the ST mode, the story section and the battle reach section are provided, so that different notifications are performed, and the interest of the player's game is improved.

  Note that the variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) to be referred to may be different between the story section and the battle reach section in the ST mode. That is, in the ST mode (ST gaming state), the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined with different selection probabilities according to the production mode (story section and battle reach section). Specifically, in the story section of the ST mode, a variation pattern (for example, shortened variation) associated with a short variation time (for example, 2s) is highly probable so that the progression of a series of story effects is prioritized. The variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) selected in (1) is referred to, and in the battle reach section of the ST mode, a variation pattern (for example, normal) associated with a relatively long variation time (for example, 6s) is referred to. A variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) in which (variation) is selected with high probability may be referred to. In the ST mode story section, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) having a different variation pattern selection probability depending on the number of executions of the special symbol game may be referred to. In the reach section, a variation pattern determination table (main variation time determination table) with different variation pattern selection probabilities depending on the number of executions of the special symbol game may be referred to.

  The live bonus during the first special symbol is that the big special symbol of the first special symbol is hit patterns 1 and 2 (substantially 9R), hit pattern 3 (substantially 5R), hit pattern 7 (substantially 8R), and hit pattern 8 This is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot gaming state corresponding to (substantially 4R) and executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot gaming states. In this live bonus, a predetermined music (any of music patterns A to C) corresponding to the type of more detailed hit pattern (for example, hit patterns 1-1 to 46) is selected, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are used. Is output. Further, in conjunction with the output of the selected predetermined music, an effect by the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 4 and an effect by the light emission mode of the lamp / LED 27 are executed. In the live bonus, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is the winning pattern 1 to 3 at the end of the production mode, the fact that the specific second round game is executed is notified, and the winning pattern 7 Or when it is 8, it notifies that a specific 2nd round game is not performed.

  During the first special symbol, it indicates that it is a big hit gaming state related to the first special symbol, and depending on the type of the winning pattern (big hit symbol), live bonus, story bonus, and battle bonus effect modes There is. The first special symbol hit is executed when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. Further, although not shown in FIG. 49, it is also executed when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time reduction mode or the ST mode. After the end of the first special symbol hit, the game shifts to the ST mode if it is a V winning in the big hit gaming state, and shifts to the time reduction mode if it is a non-V winning.

  The story bonus during the first special symbol is executed in conjunction with the big hit gaming state in which the big special symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the hit pattern 4 (substantially 5R) and the hit pattern 9 (substantially 4R). It is an effect mode that is executed as an effect mode that impresses these big hit game states. In this story bonus, a predetermined story production according to the type of winning pattern (a story production related to a series of story production executed in the above-described story section may be a story production, or an unrelated story production may be used) Is selected and executed by the effect execution means. In the case of the story bonus, when the big bonus symbol of the first special symbol is the winning pattern 4 at the end of the production mode, the fact that the specific second round game is executed is notified and the winning pattern 9 is given. In this case, it is notified that the specific second round game is not executed.

  The battle bonus during the first special symbol is a big hit gaming state in which the big special symbol of the first special symbol corresponds to the winning patterns 5 and 6 (substantially 5R) and the hit patterns 10 and 11 (substantially 0R). It is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with each other and is executed as an effect mode that impresses these jackpot game states. In this battle bonus, a predetermined battle effect according to the type of the hit pattern (may be a battle effect related to the battle effect executed in the above-described battle reach section, or may be a battle effect not related). Selected and executed by the effect execution means. In the case of the battle bonus, when the big special symbol of the first special symbol is the winning pattern 5 or 6 in the middle stage of the production mode, the specific second round game is executed and the first round game is executed. If the winning pattern is 10 or 11, it is notified that the specific second round game and the first round game are not executed.

  During the second special symbol, it indicates that it is a big hit gaming state related to the second special symbol, and the type of the hit pattern (big hit symbol) (in this embodiment, one type of the hit pattern 12) There is an effect mode of SP bonus according to (but not limited to). The second special symbol hit is executed when the big special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time reduction mode or the ST mode. Further, as described above, there is a case where the second special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal mode. After the end of the second special symbol hit, since it is basically easy to win a V-win in all big hit gaming states, the mode shifts to the ST mode. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 49, if it is a non-V prize-winning in the big hit game state, it will transfer to time reduction mode.

  The SP bonus during the second special symbol is executed in conjunction with the big hit gaming state in which the big special symbol of the second special symbol corresponds to the winning pattern 12 (substantially 16R), and impresses this big hit gaming state. This is an effect mode executed as an effect mode. With this SP bonus, a specific second round game is basically executed, and it is notified that the first round game is executed the most number of times compared to other big hit game states. In the SP bonus, when the second special symbol is reached in the short-time mode, an SP bonus per-effect pattern in which an effect mode that impresses the promotion from the short-time mode to the ST mode is executed is determined. When the second special symbol is reached in the story section, an effect pattern per SP bonus related story in which an effect mode that impresses “Renso” in the ST mode is executed, and the battle reach section in the ST mode is determined. When the second special symbol is reached, the SP bonus battle per effect pattern is determined in which the effect mode impressing the big hit pullback in the ST mode is executed.

  In addition, even if it is a case where illustration and description are not carried out between each production mode, it shall transfer with the transition of a gaming state etc., and is not restricted to the range shown and demonstrated.

[Specifications of gaming machines]
Next, the specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in this embodiment, the hit probability of a special symbol is 1 / 297.89 (220/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability variable gaming state), and when the probability is high (probability variable gaming state). ) Is 1 / 122.96 (533/65536). The order of digestion of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is digested in preference to the lottery based on the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), an ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 180 times as the number of games (the number of variations of the special symbol) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the first special symbol jackpot symbol “probability change 1”, the winning opening / closing pattern (winning pattern) is the winning pattern 1, and the round game round number is 16R (of which the actual number of rounds that are easy to win in the big winning slot is 9R), a live bonus is executed as the effect mode in the big hit gaming state, and the content of the effect is “live bonus 9R successful”. The probability (intrusion rate) of “probability change 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 46/200 (hit patterns 1-1 to 46).

In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability 2”, the winning pattern is 2 and a round number of 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 9R) is given, a live bonus is executed as a production mode, "Success". The rush rate of the jackpot symbol “probability variation 2” of the first special symbol is set to 1/200.
In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability 3”, the winning pattern is 3, and a round number 16R (of which the actual round number is 5R) is given, a live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is “live bonus 5R” "Success". The rush rate of the big hit symbol “probability variation 3” of the first special symbol is set to 18/200 (hit patterns 3-1 to 18).

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability 4”, the winning pattern is 4 and a round number of 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 5R) is given, a story bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is “story bonus 5R” "Success". The rush rate of the big hit symbol “probability variation 4” of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 4-1 to 17).

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability variation 5”, the winning pattern is 5 and a round number of 16R (of which the actual number of rounds is 5R) is given, a battle bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is “Battle bonus 5R” "Success". The rush rate of the big hit symbol “probability variation 5” of the first special symbol is set to 20/200 (hit patterns 5-1 to 20).

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “probability 6”, the winning pattern is 6 and the round number 16R (of which the actual round number is 5R) is given, the battle bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is “Battle Bonus 5R” "Success". The rush rate of the big hit symbol “probability variation 6” of the first special symbol is set to 2/200 (hit patterns 6-1, 2).

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “time reduction 1”, the winning pattern is 7, and the round number 16R (of which the actual round number is 8R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is “live bonus 8R” "Failure". The rush rate of the big special symbol “time reduction 1” of the first special symbol is set to 16/200 (hit patterns 7-1 to 16).

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “time short 2”, the winning pattern is 8 and the round number 16R (of which the actual round number is 4R) is given, the live bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is “live bonus 4R” "Failure". The rush rate of the big hit symbol “hour 2” of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 8-1 to 17).

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “time-short 3”, the winning pattern is 9 and a round number 16R (of which the actual round number is 4R) is given, a story bonus is executed as the production mode, and the production content is “story bonus 4R” "Failure". The rush rate of the big hit symbol “hour 3” of the first special symbol is set to 17/200 (hit patterns 9-1 to 17).

  In the first special symbol big hit symbol “time 4” or “time 5”, the winning pattern is 10 or 11, a round number 16R (of which the actual round number is 0R) is given, and a battle bonus is executed as a production mode. The content is “Battle Bonus 0R Failure”. The rush rate of the big hit symbol “hour / time 4” or “hour / hour 5” of the first special symbol is set to 23/200 (hit patterns 10-1 to 23 or hit patterns 11-1 to 23).

  The big special symbol “probability variation 1” of the second special symbol is a winning pattern 12 with a round number 16R (of which the actual round number is 16R), SP bonus is executed as a production mode, and “SP bonus 16R is produced as production content. " The rush rate of the jackpot symbol “probability variation 1” of the second special symbol is set to 1/1 (that is, 100%).

  The number of winning prizes is set to count up to 9 for both the first winning prize opening 36 and the second winning prize opening 37 as the maximum number of winning prizes per round. The short-time performance (specification of the short-time gaming state) is set so that the short-time gaming state continues for a maximum of 100 times or 4 times in a high probability (while in the probability variation gaming state) or in a non-probability variation gaming state. . The number of prize balls will be three per winning prize at the first starting opening 32, one per winning prize at the second starting opening 33, and one winning prize at the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. It is set so that there are 10 per winning and 14 per winning prize to the winning prize opening (first winning prize opening 36 and second winning prize opening 37).

  The normal symbol hit probability is set to 0 when the probability is low, and 1/1 when the probability is high. The number of symbols per normal symbol is set to one.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 51, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as one round opening / closing patterns (one round opening / closing patterns) in the first grand prize winning opening 36 and the second big winning prize opening 37. The first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 are simply referred to as a big prize opening unless it is particularly necessary to distinguish them. Note that the open / close patterns A to C shown in FIG. 51 are merely examples, and the specific time and the like for defining the open / close pattern may be other than those illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues for 27.222 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round interval from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in other open / close patterns, the round section is defined as a period from the first opening state to the final closing state. The section in which the open state is 27.222s is a long open in which the open state of the big prize opening is relatively long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 27.222s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the open state is initially 0.102 s, the closed state is 2.898 s, and then the open state continues again for 27.222 s. The section in which the open state is 0.102 s is a short open in which the open state of the big prize opening is relatively short. That is, the open / close pattern B is a pattern in which a short open occurs once, then a closed state occurs once and a long open occurs once, and the total open time of the open / close pattern B is 27.324 s. In the open state where the short is open, it is extremely difficult to win a game ball in the grand prize opening. On the other hand, in the open state where the long is open, it is possible and easy to win the game ball in the big winning opening. ing. Such a short opening is the same in the opening / closing pattern C described later.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only for 0.102 s. That is, the open / close pattern C is a pattern in which a short open is generated only once, and the total open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.102 s.

  Thus, the substantial round game in the big hit game state corresponds to the round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the above-described opening / closing pattern A or B. The round game when the opening / closing control is performed based on the opening / closing pattern C is a non-real round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / closed state of the second big prize opening 37. As shown in FIG. 52, in principle, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern) is that the specific region 38A is closed after the operation period in which the specific region 38A is opened first is 0.102s. The non-operation period is 2.898 s, and after that, the operation period is defined as an operation pattern that continues for a maximum of 29.222 s. The total operation time of the displacement member operation pattern is 32.222 s. During the operation period of 0.102 s, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively short, so it is very difficult to win a V in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, in the operation period that is 29.222 s at the longest, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, so that V winning in the specific area 38A is relatively easy. For the operation period of the maximum 29.222 s, in the first round in which the second big prize opening 37 is opened and closed, for example, the second big prize opening 37 is closed by reaching the upper prize number. When a predetermined monitoring processing time relating to a residual sphere described later is passed, the displacement member 39 is inoperative and the specific area 38A is in a closed state even before the predetermined maximum length of 29.222s has elapsed. May be.

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the big winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the round interval in the big hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 53, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 12 are defined as the special winning opening opening / closing patterns (winning patterns). The winning patterns 1 and 2 are generated when a live bonus (live bonus 9R is successful), and the number of rounds defined for the round that is generally open (hereinafter referred to as “the number of specified rounds”) is 16R. This is a winning pattern in which the actual number of rounds that can be won is defined as 9R. In addition, the interval between rounds is the interval in which the grand prize opening is closed in the first round until the grand prize opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the pattern of the interval between rounds, an interval pattern a in which the time for closing (closing time) is 1200 ms and an interval pattern b in which 102 ms is set are defined. In the winning patterns 1 and 2, the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern b, the second big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big prize opening 36 opens and closes at the 1st to 8th rounds. It is defined to be pattern A. That is, the winning patterns 1 and 2 are executed as 9 rounds of the 1R to 8R and 10R substantial rounds, and only the 10R round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

  The winning pattern 3 is a winning pattern that occurs when the live bonus (live bonus 5R is successful), and is defined as a prescribed number of rounds of 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the winning pattern 3, all round intervals are the interval pattern b, the second big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in the 10Rth, and the first big prize opening 36 is the opening / closing pattern A in the 1R to 4Rth. It is stipulated to be. That is, the winning pattern 3 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 5 rounds of 1R to 4R and 10R, and only the 10R round is easy to win V in the specific area 38A.

  The winning pattern 4 is a winning pattern that occurs when the story bonus (story bonus 5R is successful), and is specified with a specified number of rounds of 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the winning pattern 4, the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern b, the second big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in the 10th round, and the first big winning opening 36 is the opening / closing pattern A in the first to fourth rounds It is stipulated to be. That is, the winning pattern 4 is executed as a round in which the number of substantial rounds is 5 rounds of 1R to 4R and 10R, and V winning to the specific area 38A is easy only for the 10R round.

  The winning patterns 5 and 6 are hit patterns that are generated when a battle bonus (battle bonus 5R is successful), and are defined as having a prescribed number of rounds of 16R and of which the actual number of rounds is 5R. In the winning patterns 5 and 6, the interval between the rounds 1R to 10R is the interval pattern a, the interval between the other rounds is the interval pattern b, and the second big prize opening 37 is the 10Rth. In addition to the opening / closing pattern B, the first big prize opening 36 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern A in the 11th to 14th eyes. That is, the winning patterns 5 and 6 are executed as rounds in which the number of substantial rounds is 10R to 14R, and V winning to the specific area 38A is easy only for the 10Rth round.

  The winning pattern 7 is a winning pattern that occurs when a live bonus (live bonus 8R failure) is specified and the specified number of rounds is 16R, of which the actual number of rounds is 8R. The winning pattern 7 is defined such that all round intervals are interval patterns b, and the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 8th rounds. That is, the winning pattern 7 has 8 rounds of 1R to 8R in actual number of rounds, and a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

  The winning pattern 8 is a winning pattern that occurs when a live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is specified and the specified round number is 16R, and the actual round number is 4R. The winning pattern 8 is defined such that all round intervals are the interval pattern b, and the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the first to fourth rounds. That is, the winning pattern 8 has four rounds of 1R to 4R in actual number of rounds, and a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

  The winning pattern 9 is a winning pattern that occurs when a story bonus (story bonus 4R failure) is specified, and the specified round number is 16R and the actual round number is 4R. The winning pattern 9 is defined such that all round intervals are the interval pattern b, and the first big prize opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the first to fourth rounds. That is, the winning pattern 9 has four rounds of 1R to 4R in actual number of rounds, and a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

  The winning patterns 10 and 11 are hit patterns that occur when a battle bonus (battle bonus 0R failure) occurs, and the specified round number is 16R and the actual round number is 0R. In the hit patterns 10 and 11, the interval between rounds 1R to 10R is the interval pattern a, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern b, and the first in all the 1R to 16R. The special winning opening 36 is defined to be an opening / closing pattern C. That is, in the winning patterns 10 and 11, the actual number of rounds is 0R, and a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

  The winning pattern 12 is a winning pattern that occurs when the SP bonus (live bonus 16R) is specified, and the specified round number is 16R and the actual round number is 16R. In the winning pattern 12, all the intervals between rounds are interval patterns b, the second big prize opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern B at the 10th round, and the first big prize winning openings at the 1R to 9R and 11th to 16th rounds. 36 is defined as an opening / closing pattern A. That is, the winning pattern 12 is 16 rounds whose actual rounds are the same as the prescribed round number, and only the 10th round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

  In addition, in the winning patterns 1 to 6 and 12, the round (specific second round game) in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy to be executed only in the 10Rth is not limited to this. The specific second round game may be executed in the other rounds (1st to 9th R, 11th to 16th R). Further, a plurality of specific second round games may be executed in these winning patterns. Further, in each of the above winning patterns including these winning patterns, the second big winning opening 37 is opened, but a round (usually the second round game) in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is difficult is executed. It is good. In FIG. 53, as an interval between rounds, a location where the interval pattern a is defined may be defined as the interval pattern b, and a location where the interval pattern b is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a. That is, various modifications are made depending on the effect mode in the effect mode of the big hit gaming state (live bonus, story bonus, battle bonus, or SP bonus being in the second special symbol). It can be performed.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. The table defines lottery value (random value) information for determining predetermined items based on lottery values (random numbers) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the “random number value” may be simply referred to as “random number”.

<Sub-production content determination table>
54 and 55 are diagrams showing a part of the sub effect content determination table. The sub effect content determination table is a table that is referred to in an effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 83 described later) of the sub CPU 71, which will be described later, and a jackpot determination is made for each effect mode (or for each gaming state). Various results such as results (winning), current gaming state (non-probability / non-time-short, non-probability / time-short, probability-change / time-short), type of variation pattern designation command, sub-effect selection random number range (lottery value), etc. According to the parameters, the type of effect pattern to be determined (sub-effect content) is defined. Note that the sub effect content determination table shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 is a sub effect content determination table in order to explain the item prefetch effect (see FIGS. 43 to 48 and FIGS. 111 to 113 described later) in this embodiment. A part of the specified item pre-reading effects is extracted and shown, and the contents of the item pre-reading effects and other effects are not limited thereto. The item pre-reading effect is an effect for notifying the degree of expectation as to whether or not it has been determined that a big hit will be made by displaying items (for example, plates A to D described later).

In the sub effect content determination table shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, the effect patterns of the item prefetch effects 1 to 24 that are the item effect contents are defined, and 1 based on each selection probability (sub effect selection random number range). The production pattern is determined. In addition, in the item prefetch effects 1 to 24, which are item effects, the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D are defined as a plurality of items, and the number (number of sheets) of each plate is defined. ing. 54 and 55, although the illustration is omitted, the item prefetch effects 1 to 24 which are the contents of the item effects include a pseudo-continuous effect described later as a plurality of expectation types, a serif effect described later, and a later described effect. A cut-in effect and other promotion (reverse) effects described later are defined, and respective expectation levels (stages indicating high and low expectations) are defined. Here, the plate A corresponds to the pseudo-continuous effect as the expectation type, the plate B corresponds to the serif effect as the expectation type, and the plate C is the cut-in effect as the expectation type. The plate D corresponds to other promotion (reversal) effects as an expected degree type. The expectation type refers to the effect itself for notifying different types of expectation in individual effects constituting part of the item prefetching effect (more specifically, the effect executed in the item use effect process described later) or The level of expectation is shown, and by combining these expectations, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the overall item prefetching effect is determined to be a big hit will be determined.

<Performance pattern determination table>
FIG. 56 shows a winning effect pattern determination table. The winning effect pattern determination table is a table that is referred to in a winning effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 91 described later) of the sub CPU 71 described later, and is determined according to the lottery value for each type of winning pattern. The type of pattern is specified. In the winning effect pattern determination table, music patterns A to C constituting a live bonus, story patterns D and E constituting a story bonus, and battle patterns F and G constituting a battle bonus are defined as types of the winning effect pattern. ing. The lottery value defines lottery value information when the random number range is 32768. The lottery rate when the lottery value is 32768 is 32768/32768, that is, 100%. However, the winning effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 shows an example, and the specified lottery value information (lottery rate) is not limited to this.

  The music pattern A further includes a music pattern A (success) that constitutes a live bonus 9R success, a music pattern A (reverse) that constitutes a live bonus 5R success, a music pattern that constitutes a live bonus 8R failure and a live bonus 4R failure. There is a winning production pattern of A (failure). That is, when the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A (reversal) is determined as the winning effect pattern, it is basically determined that the transition to the ST mode (special gaming state) is made after the end of the big hit gaming state. . On the other hand, when the music pattern A (failure) is determined as the winning effect pattern, it is basically determined that the mode is not shifted to the ST mode after the end of the big hit gaming state but is shifted to the time reduction mode.

  The music pattern B further includes a music pattern B (success) constituting the live bonus 9R success, a music pattern B (reversal) constituting the live bonus 5R success, a music pattern constituting the live bonus 8R failure and the live bonus 4R failure. There is a winning production pattern of B (failure). That is, when the music pattern B (success) or the music pattern B (reverse) is determined as the winning effect pattern, it is basically determined that the ST mode (special gaming state) is shifted to after the jackpot gaming state ends. . On the other hand, when the music pattern B (failure) is determined as the winning effect pattern, it is basically determined that the transition to the short-time mode is not performed after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  The music pattern C is one type of the music pattern C (confirmed). When the music pattern C (confirmed) is determined as the winning effect pattern, the ST mode (special game state) is basically obtained after the jackpot game state is ended. ) Is confirmed. Each of the music patterns A to C is a music pattern in which different music is output, and the degree of expectation that it is determined to shift to the ST mode (special game state) differs depending on the type of music to be output. It has become.

  The music pattern A (success) is associated with the hit patterns 1-1 to 8 (that is, eight hit patterns), and the song pattern A (failure) is the hit patterns 7-1 to 12 (that is, 12 hit patterns). Hit pattern). Here, the hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern in which a specific second round game of 1R (10R) is executed after the first round game of 8R (1 to 8R) is executed, and the hit pattern 7 is , 8R (1 to 8R) after the first round game is executed, the specific second round game is not executed. That is, when the music pattern A is determined, when the first round game of 8R (1 to 8R) is executed, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game is 40 at 8/20. %.

  The music pattern A (reverse) is associated with the hit patterns 3-1 to 6 (that is, six hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is the hit patterns 8-1 to 9 (that is, 9). Are associated with each other). Here, the winning pattern 3 is a winning pattern in which the specific second round game of 1R (10R) is executed after the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, and the winning pattern 8 is This is a hit pattern in which the specific second round game is not executed after the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed. That is, when the music pattern A is determined, when the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game is 40/15. %.

  The music pattern B (success) is associated with the hit patterns 1-9 to 14 (that is, six hit patterns), and the song pattern B (failure) is the hit patterns 7-13 to 16 (that is, four hit patterns). Hit pattern). That is, when the music pattern B is determined, when the first round game of 8R (1 to 8R) is executed, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game is 60 on 6/10 %.

  The music pattern B (reverse) is associated with the hit patterns 3-7 to 18 (that is, 12 hit patterns), and the music pattern B (failure) is the hit patterns 8-10 to 17 (that is, 8). Are associated with each other). That is, when the music pattern B is determined, when the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game is 60 at 12/20 %.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific number when the music pattern B is selected is higher than the expectation level (40%) that the specific second round game is executed when the music pattern A is selected. The expectation level (60%) at which the two-round game is executed is configured to be higher. By being configured in this way, it is possible to change the degree of expectation between music pieces, and it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation in a live bonus (specific game state).

  For example, in the music pattern A, when the first round game of 4R (1 to 4R) is executed, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game (that is, the hit pattern 3 or the hit pattern 8 is When the determination is made, 8R portion (1) is expected from the expectation that the music pattern A (reverse rotation) is selected when either the music pattern A (reverse rotation) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected. -8R) When the first round game is executed, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game (that is, when the hit pattern 1 or the hit pattern 7 is determined, the music pattern A (success) In addition, the music pattern A (successful expectation that the music pattern A (success) is selected) when either of the music pattern B (failure) is selected may be configured to be higher.

Specifically, the music pattern A (reverse) is associated with the hit pattern 3 (that is, 18 hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) is associated with the hit pattern 8 (that is, 17 hit patterns). The music pattern A (success) may be associated with the hit pattern 1 (that is, 46 hit patterns), and the music pattern A (failure) may be associated with the hit pattern 7 (that is, 16 hit patterns). In this case, when one of the music pattern A (reverse) and the music pattern A (failure) is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200), the degree of expectation that the music pattern A (reverse) is selected (for example, 18/35) Expected to select the music pattern A (success) in the case where either the music pattern A (success) or the music pattern A (failure) is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) The degree (eg, 46/62) can be increased. With this configuration, after a predetermined branch period (for example, a first branch section described later) has elapsed, a second common part of the music pattern A (for example, a second melody in the second section described later) is output. Since the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game is relatively high, the role of a predetermined branch period (for example, a first branch section described later) can be diversified, and the big hit game state ( It is possible to further increase the player's expectation in the specific gaming state.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the main process executed by the main CPU 61. FIG. This main process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 57, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S <b> 12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the power interruption detection state is present. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is set, and the process proceeds to S12. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  In S <b> 14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 58), and if it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, it proceeds to S16. Move processing.

  In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S17, and if it determines that there is no power interruption detection flag, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 58). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, moves the process to S30. .

  In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a display to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state in the case of the probability variation gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the notification display may be configured to end at the start or end of the first fluctuation after power-on.

  In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S24, where the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting 8000H in the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S <b> 34, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process for the work area when the RAM is initialized. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S <b> 35, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. In the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S <b> 36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for prohibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for permitting an interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the rendering condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S42, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process proceeds to S37.

  In S <b> 42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 is a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and a big winning opening for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening that is opened when a big hit occurs. An open time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring a minimum output period of a security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that an illegal act has been detected, and the like. Execute processing to update the timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a random number value for hit determination and a random number value for hit symbol determination in accordance with detection signals from the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330. Then, with reference to a jackpot determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62, it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (a jackpot lottery) has been won, and processing for storing the determination result in the main RAM 63 is performed. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines, based on the detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, whether the symbol is a lost symbol or a winning symbol based on the normal symbol hit probability (see FIG. 50). Processing for storing the result is performed. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if not winning, the determination result indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, 3 times in 1.3 seconds, or 4 times in 1.4 seconds, or 6 times in 1.8 seconds. To do. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing member 34 is opened, and when the wing member 34 is in the open state, the game ball can easily win the second starting port 33. The main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value according to the detection signal from the pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the main ROM 62. Based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won, and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determining random value, and the normal symbol determining table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62 are determined. (Omitted) may be determined based on whether the symbol is a lost symbol or a winning symbol. If this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 outputs a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. The process to memorize is performed. The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 variably displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for generating data related to game information signals to be transmitted to the base computer or the hall computer 100 and storing the data in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  In S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol reservation number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the first start port switch 320 and the second switch detected by the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 61) in the timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated in accordance with the execution of the change display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first A process for storing in the main RAM 63 a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs the security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and the LED power source (common signal) for lighting the LED, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A, and the second grand prize. Solenoid power is supplied to drive the solenoid that opens and closes the mouth shutter 37A and the blade member 34. If this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  In S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning mouth related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process for controlling a winning opening related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main process, the main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process. This timer interrupt process is a process performed according to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. If this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  In S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by one. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on the condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process in S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 starts from the initial reset circuit 64. A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  In S63, the main CPU 61 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. The hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter are not fair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, a fixed timing every 2 ms is required to ensure this. I am trying to update with. If this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  In S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area has detected a winning. For example, when detecting a winning, the main CPU 61 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won. The switch input process in S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 wins a game ball in the first grand prize opening 36, the second big prize opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning openings 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D. If there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout / launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out a prize ball corresponding to a winning area whose bit is “1 (ON)” in accordance with the winning of a game ball from the payout device 83. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command setting is controlled to “0 (OFF)”. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. If this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process is finished, this timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 60, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times of execution (startup) of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of execution (startup) of the timer interrupt process reaches a predetermined condition (three times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S71.

  In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for measuring various execution waiting times. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  In S <b> 72, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. The remaining ball monitoring timer is a ball path from the first big prize opening 36 to the first big prize opening count switch 360, or a ball path from the second big prize opening 37 to the second big prize opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the residual sphere monitoring processing time for monitoring the residual sphere remaining in the. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S77, and determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is not “0”. , The process is moved to S73. When the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0” and the game is not in a round game, an error may be notified when the special winning opening count switch detects a game ball.

  In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S74.

  In S74, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining again whether or not the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S77, and determines that the value of the residual sphere monitoring timer is “0”. , The process is moved to S75.

  In S75, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the specific area 38A is being opened. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the specific area 38A is not open, it moves the process to S77, and if it determines that the specific area 38A is open, it moves the process to S76.

  In S76, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on a control signal based on this data. Thereby, the displacement member 39 is driven so that the specific region 38A is closed. If this process ends, the process moves to S77. As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0” after the second big prize opening 37 ends the long opening (section where the open state is 27.222 s) and is closed. Then, the specific member 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state by forcibly controlling the displacement member 39 from the operating state to the non-operating state. That is, the specific region 38A is in a closed state after an open state of about 28.320s, which is slightly shorter than 29.222s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG.

  In S77, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged after winning the second big prize opening 37. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, S78. Move processing to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (short time) is set in the residual sphere monitoring timer than the discharge monitoring timer, but it may be the same or a larger value (long time).

  In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S <b> 79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. Moves the process to S80.

  In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “10”. The special winning opening opening number counter is a counter used to identify the 10th R opening / closing of the second special winning opening 37. Therefore, the value of the number-of-opening counters of the big prize opening does not count the number of times the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 are actually opened, but is incremented by 1 for each round. is there. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not “10”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S82 and determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “10”. If so, the process moves to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, this timer update process routine is ended, and the control state flag indicates the process for opening the special prize opening. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter. The second grand prize opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second big winning opening 37 detected by the second big winning opening count switch 370. The discharged ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharged balls of game balls detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is the same as the value of the discharge ball counter. In this process, when the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second big winning opening winning prize counter is If it is greater than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from when the game ball is detected by the second grand prize opening count switch 370 until it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. It corresponds to time. Therefore, when it is determined in this process that the value of the second big prize opening prize counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the ball inside the second big prize opening 37 is clogged, or the second largest due to the so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning mouth count switch 370 is detected.

  In S83, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the discharge is not normally performed. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  In S84, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the second grand prize winning prize counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the timer update process routine ends. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 61, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor that can detect radio waves (not shown), a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetism, a vibration sensor that can detect vibration, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S91. If any of the sensors described above is in the detected state, an error notification may be given, and even if, for example, a big prize opening count switch detects a winning of a game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may make it do.

  In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S92.

  In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, this process is terminated. When it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, processing for outputting a detection signal is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input from the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first start opening switch 320, and the second start opening switch 330. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and the first start opening switch 320 or the second start opening When it is determined that there is an input from the mouth switch 330, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding start opening winning counter is performed. When this process is finished, this switch input process routine is finished.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 62, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S101.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first big prize opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second big prize opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is finished.

[First start switch check processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 63, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first start port 32 is detected based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first start port When the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S111, and when the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the first starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the first start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S112.

  In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved first symbol symbols stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S113.

  In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Then, the rendering condition determination random value is extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and are obtained by winning the game ball at the first starting port 32 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). If this process ends, the process moves to S114.

  In S114, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S115.

  In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S <b> 116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that a game ball has been won and the winning lottery result is determined. It becomes like this. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing the winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed for the effect when it is determined that the winning effect is obtained in the process of S115. As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory before the execution of variation is possible. When this process is finished, the first start port switch check process routine is finished.

[Second start-up switch check process]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 64, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a game ball winning in the second start port 33 is detected based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second start port When the bit of the winning detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S121, and when the bit of the second starting port winning detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the second starting port The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the second start-up switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S122.

  In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserves of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. The random number value for effect condition determination is extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and the various kinds obtained by winning the game ball at the second starting port 33 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  In S124, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to win a prize based on a random number lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S <b> 126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is finished, the second start port switch check process routine is finished.

[First big prize exit switch check process]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the first big prize opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first big prize opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 65, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first big prize opening 36 is detected based on a detection signal from the first big prize opening count switch 360. Perform the process. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that a winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 36 has been detected, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S131 and detects the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36. If it is determined that it is not, the first big prize opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first grand prize winning prize counter. The first grand prize winning prize counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit number of winnings per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S132.

  In S <b> 132, the main CPU 61 sets the first grand prize winning prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first big prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the secondary control circuit 70, so that the secondary control circuit 70 makes a winning of the game ball to the first big prize opening 36. Become aware. Thereby, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout winning balls) displayed during the extra bonus is displayed in addition. When this process is finished, the first big prize opening switch check processing routine is finished.

[Second Grand Prize Exit Switch Check Processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the second big prize opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second grand prize opening switch check process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 66, in S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not winning of a game ball to the second big prize opening 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the second big prize opening count switch 370. Perform the process. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second big winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S141 and detects the winning of the gaming ball to the second big winning opening 37. If it is determined not to be performed, the process proceeds to S143.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second big prize winning prize counter. The second grand prize opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit winning number per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S <b> 142, the main CPU 61 sets a second grand prize winning prize command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second grand prize opening prize command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the secondary control circuit 70, whereby the secondary control circuit 70 makes a winning of the game ball to the second big prize opening 37. Become aware. Also by this, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout winning balls) displayed during the extra bonus is additionally displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected based on a detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S144 and determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process proceeds to S152.

  In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S145.

  In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “10”. The big prize opening number counter is as described above. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not “10”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S152 and determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is “10”. If so, the process moves to S146.

  In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big winning opening, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S149, and the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the special winning opening. ), If not, the process proceeds to S147.

    In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management waiting time management process before restarting the winning prize opening or a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. I do. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is “05H” or “06H”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S148, and determines that the control status flag is neither “05H” nor “06H”. Moves the process to S152.

  In S <b> 148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is greater than “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is greater than “0”, the process proceeds to S149, and when it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than “0”. In step S152, the process proceeds to step S152. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than “0”, it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may make it do.

  In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passing flag is “01H”. The specific area passing flag is an internal flag whose value is set to “01H” when a V winning of a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passing flag is “01H”, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S152, and when it determines that the value of the specific area passing flag is not “01H”. , Processing proceeds to S150.

  In S150, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” to the value of the specific area passing flag. The value “01H” of the specific area passing flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probability-changing gaming state is determined after the end of the big hit gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S151.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passing command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area passing command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning in the specific area 38A. If this process ends, the process moves to S152.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 proceeds to S153 and determines that the passing of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In the case, the process proceeds to S154.

  In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S154.

  In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B without the game ball being detected by the second grand prize opening count switch 370. judge. In this process, if the value of the second grand prize opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the second big winning opening switch check processing routine, and the second big winning prize opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S155.

  In S155, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command is as described above. If this process ends, the process moves to S156.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second grand prize winning prize counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process is finished, the second big prize opening switch check process routine is finished. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in units of the following steps. In FIG. 67, the numerical values shown from the side of S161 to S168 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the control state flag storage area in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S161.

  In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S161 to S168 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

  In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. Details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S162.

  In S162, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and when the variation time has elapsed, sets the value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the waiting time after determination has elapsed, the setting of S163 is performed. Details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. In the case of a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the setting of S164 is performed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. Details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S164.

  In S164, the main CPU 61 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the main CPU 61 reads the first big prize read from the main ROM 62. Data for opening the mouth shutter 36A and the second big prize mouth shutter 37A and data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. 58, in the process of S49 of FIG. 58, the main CPU 61 stores the data and the displacement member 39 for opening the first big prize opening shutter 36A and the second big prize opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63. Data for opening is read, and control signals based on these data are supplied to the first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 performs opening / closing control of the first grand prize winning port 36 and the second grand prize winning port 37. Details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  In S165, the main CPU 61 executes a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the big winning opening, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a and b) has elapsed. The grand prize opening number counter is stored and updated so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.222s of the opening / closing pattern A) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it sets so that the process of S166 may be performed. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for opening / closing the displacement member 39. Details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S166.

  In S166, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 61 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “9” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big prize opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first big prize winning port 36 or the second big prize winning port 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value indicating the hit end interval (06H) in the control state flag in the case of the final round, and a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management before re-opening of the big prize opening in the case of not being the final round. Is set in the control status flag. Details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S167.

  In S167, the main CPU 61 executes a hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game to the control state when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. Details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S168.

  In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the main CPU 61 performs processing at the end of the special symbol game (for example, 1 indicating the end of one game from the external terminal board 80). A game end signal, a process for outputting a jackpot signal indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed, etc.) and a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check is set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. Details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol control process routine is finished.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), (02H), and (07H) when the hit determination result is lost when the game is not in the big hit gaming state. Thus, the processing of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 67 is executed at a predetermined timing. Further, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in order of (00H), (01H), and (02H), thereby causing S161 shown in FIG. , S162 and S163 are executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state is started. Further, when the main CPU 61 is in the big hit gaming state, the control state flags are set in order of (03H), (04H), and (05H), thereby performing the processes of S164, S166, and S165 shown in FIG. The big hit gaming state is executed at this timing. If the end condition of the big hit gaming state is satisfied, the processing of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 67 is executed at a predetermined timing by sequentially setting (04H), (06H), and (07H). Then, the big hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 68, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of the start memory. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S173.

  In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state in which the special symbol game start memory (the first special symbol start memory area or the second special symbol start memory area in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is “0” for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command stored in this way is supplied as a demonstration display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Thereby, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is “0”. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S174. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not “0”, that is, the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Move processing to.

  In S <b> 174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  In S177, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 converts each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) to the first special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data in (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. If this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  In S178, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) that are jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game state flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the high probability jackpot determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with a small number is referred. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability-changing gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state as a special gaming state that easily shifts to the specific gaming state (big-hitting gaming state), The probability of transition will be higher than the non-probability variable gaming state as the non-special gaming state, which is less likely to transition to the specific gaming state than the probability variation gaming state as the special gaming state.

  Note that the special game state is a probability change / short-time game state and the non-special game state is basically a non-probability change / non-time-short game state. This includes cases where the game is in short-time gaming.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is used for determining whether or not the special symbol start storage area is extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the jackpot probability due to winning in the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be greater or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning in the second starting port 33. The jackpot probability due to winning at the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be greater or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning at the second starting port 33.

  Thus, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  In S179, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is a big win, and determining a lost symbol when the big hit is lost. Details of S179 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S180.

  In S180, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines a different variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of S179, the result of the jackpot determination in the process of S178, and the value of the probability variation counter. Select a decision table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random value extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST game state and the normal game state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same in the ST gaming state.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S181.

  In S181, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the current variation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S182.

  In S182, the main CPU 61 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol determination processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing special symbol determination processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S191. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S198.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 moves the process to S192 if the change state number is a value (01H) indicating that the change is the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the variation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 is the value (02H) indicating that the variation state number is the variation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S194.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random number value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol distribution in FIG. 50) based on the random number value for determining the winning symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the jackpot determination table. A process corresponding to any one of probability variation 1 to probability variation 6, time reduction 1 to time reduction 5 is determined. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S196.

  In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol allocation in FIG. 50) based on the random symbol value for determining the winning symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter and the jackpot determination table. A process for determining a symbol corresponding to probability variation 1 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S195.

  In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S196.

  In S196, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S197.

  In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs data relating to the number of times of opening of the first prize winning opening 36 and the second winning prize opening 37 related to the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, that is, probability variation 1 to probability variation 6 according to the first special symbol, time reduction 1 to time reduction 5 or data corresponding to probability variation 1 by the second special symbol is set in the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, in S198, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit in S190, that is, it is a lost game, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the lost symbol data of the special symbol. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the manner of disabling display. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value indicates the special symbol variation time management (01H), it moves the process to S211. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In S212, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the processing to S213.

  In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. The symbol stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S <b> 214, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation time management processing executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S223. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S224.

  In S223, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. The time-saving counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol fluctuation frequency) in the time-saving gaming state. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S225.

  In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228.

  In step S227, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a time reduction end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the short time end command is supplied as a command indicating the gaming state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the short time gaming state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation frequency) in the probability variation gaming state. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S229.

  In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S230.

  In S230, the main CPU 61 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S231. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233.

  In S231, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a probability variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change gaming state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied as a command indicating the game state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  In S232, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S235. In this embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is when the big hit symbol is “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 4”, “time reduction 1” to “time reduction 3”. Is 50,000 ms for other jackpot symbols, and the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 3000 ms when the jackpot symbol is “probability 1”.

  In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the winning start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the start of the big hit gaming state. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit gaming state and a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S236.

  In S236, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 72, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit start interval management process (03H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

  In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and moves the process to S243.

  In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening opening number counter, and moves the process to S244.

  In S244, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big win symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 53 corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined in S244. If this process ends, the process moves to S245.

  In S <b> 245, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S246.

  In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S247.

  In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S248.

  In S248, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S249.

  In S <b> 249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 27.222 s when the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the special winning opening opening number counter (for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is “probability 1”). If this process ends, the process moves to S250.

  In S <b> 250, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37. The variable stored in this way is to drive the first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37. Become. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends.

[Question management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time question management process before reopening of the big prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management process routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before reopening the big winning opening.

  In S <b> 262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S263.

  In S <b> 263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S264.

  In S 264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S265.

  In S <b> 265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S266.

  In S266, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S267.

  In S <b> 267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S268.

  In S <b> 268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, the waiting time question management process routine before reopening the big prize opening is finished.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the special prize opening is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big prize opening, the process proceeds to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the process for opening the big prize opening, the main routine for opening the special prize opening is ended.

  In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big prize winning prize counter is “9” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is “9” or more, it moves the process to S272. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big prize opening prize counter is not “10” or more, the process moves to S274.

  In S272, the main CPU 61 executes a big winning opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the type of jackpot and the current round, and moves the process to S273.

  In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the big winning opening opening time is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine for opening the special winning opening.

  In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the big prize closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this way is to close the first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the residual sphere monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S <b> 276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed big prize opening is the second big prize opening 37. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed big prize opening is the second big prize opening 37, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S277. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the closed big prize opening is not the second big prize opening 37, that is, the first big prize opening 36, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S278.

  In S277, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S278.

  In S278, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of large winning opening (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the large winning opening number (rounds), and the value of the large winning opening number counter It is determined whether or not is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening. Here, the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the prize winning opening is 16 times (16R). If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening number, the process proceeds to S282. On the other hand, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the special winning opening number, the process proceeds to S279.

  In S279, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63 based on the winning pattern and the number of rounds. That is, the time corresponding to the interval pattern a or b is set based on the winning pattern and the current number of rounds (see FIG. 53). The interval display time between rounds may be set to a time different from the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b. If this process ends, the process moves to S280.

  In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S <b> 281, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, in S <b> 282, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S283. In this embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 20000 ms when the big hit symbol is “probability variation 1” to “probability variation 6”, and “time reduction 1” to “ When the time is 5 ", it is 10000 ms, and the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 20000 ms if the big hit symbol is" probability change 1 "and the big win in the non-probability variable gaming state, the probability change If it is a big hit in the gaming state, it is 5000 ms. As described above, in this embodiment, the hit end interval display time at the end of the so-called first hit (first big hit that triggers the transition from the non-probability variable gaming state to the probability variable gaming state) In this case, the winning end interval display time at the end is set longer than the jackpot at which the probability variation gaming state continues.

  In S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S284.

  In S <b> 284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The winning end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

[Hit end interval management processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit end interval management process (06H), the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, it moves the process to S292. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the hit end interval management processing routine.

  In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passing flag of the main RAM 63 is “01H”. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passing flag is not “01H”, the process proceeds to S297.

  In S <b> 294, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “02H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “02H” indicates a probability change game state and a short-time game state. If this process ends, the process moves to S295.

  In S <b> 295, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “180” as the ST count in the value of the probability variation counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S296.

  In S <b> 296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “00H” in the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S299.

  In S 297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “01H” in the game state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag “01H” indicates a non-probable change gaming state and a short-time gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S298.

  In S <b> 298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting “4” or “100” as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction number counter in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S299. When “4” is set as the number of time reductions, it is a case where the big hit symbol is “time reduction 2” to “time reduction 4” in the non-probability changing game state and the non-time reduction game state, and in other situations the time reduction game state When shifting to, “100” is set as the number of time reductions.

  In S299, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type of the winning winning gaming state in addition to the gaming state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state and the information indicating the remaining number of times as a short time. The remaining number of time reductions is also referred to as the remaining time reduction number as described later, and means the time reduction number of “4” or “100” set in the process of S298. In other words, the remaining number of time reductions (remaining short time number) does not mean the time reduction number remaining at an arbitrary time in the time reduction mode, but merely indicates the time reduction number remaining at the start of the time reduction mode. The gaming state command including information such as the remaining number of times is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S301, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end processing according to the open / close pattern for each set round in the type of jackpot and the current round, and moves the processing to S302. In the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 61 executes a process for outputting a one game end signal or a big hit signal from the external terminal board 80 to the hall computer 100. In S <b> 302, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 93. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as a display control process.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 77, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing in response to power-on. If this process ends, the process moves to S311.

  In S <b> 311, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S312.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S313. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for display in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. A display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) converts various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and rendering image data into image data based on data for displaying the rendering image from the sub CPU 71. The data is read from the ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S314.

  In S <b> 314, the sub CPU 71 performs a sound control process for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10 a, 10 b, and 10 c via the sound control circuit 77. If this process ends, the process moves to S315.

  In step S <b> 315, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling light emission (lighting / flashing) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S316.

  In step S <b> 316, the sub CPU 71 performs a movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 101A and the lower movable effect member 101B. When this process is completed, the process moves to S311 and thereafter the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even if the sub CPU 71 is executing the main process, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute a command reception interrupt process or a timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 78, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIGS. If this process ends, the process moves to S322.

  In step S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S320 to each register. When this process is finished, the command reception interrupt process routine is finished.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (adding / subtracting) a timer value set for effect control. If this process ends, the process moves to S332.

  In step S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for detecting whether or not the pressing operation button 9A is operated. That is, when a predetermined effect is performed, if the predetermined effect changes depending on whether or not the push button 9A is operated, the content of the effect is changed based on the determination result in this process. Is controlled.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S330 to each register. When this process is finished, the timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
80 and 81 are flowcharts showing the command analysis process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 80, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, it moves the process to S391. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has not been received, the command analysis processing routine ends.

  In step S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the received command data, and performs processing according to the command data in subsequent steps. When the sub CPU 71 finishes reading the received command data, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S392.

  In step S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in step S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S393. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the variation pattern designation command as the read command, it moves the process to S394.

  In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including a decorative symbol variation display mode based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the decorative symbol variation display mode, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. This effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  The determination of the effect pattern may be performed based on the received variation pattern designation command as described above, or may be performed based on the received start winning command. Moreover, it is good also as performing each information contained in these commands collectively.

  In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S395. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S396.

  In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  The decorative symbols displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers “1” to “7”, and these decorative symbols (numbers) have a predetermined number (for example, three (3 When the digits)) are arranged with the same decorative symbols (numbers), the game will be shifted to the big hit gaming state. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the loss are other than these, but a specific number (for example, two) is stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol (number) (reach), and the rest (for example, 1) The one that stops with different decorative symbols (numbers) is called reach lose eye. However, even if it is a loose eye, even if a specific loose eye that suggests a specific meaning (for example, “753” that means 753 ”) is stopped and displayed, it may be possible to shift to the big hit gaming state. .

  In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a symbol stop command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S397. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S398.

  In step S <b> 397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decoration symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is variably displayed. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S398, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit start display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S399. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit start display command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S401.

  In S399, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. The winning effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S400.

  In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start effect process. This winning start effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the big winning opening winning command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a big prize winning command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S402. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the big prize opening prize command as the read command, it moves the process to S403.

  In S402, the sub CPU 71 executes prize ball counter addition processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state (or in the consecutive game) according to the number of game balls won in the big winning mouth (the first big winning mouth 36 and the second big winning mouth 37). Counts the number of prize balls in all jackpot game states that have been transferred to the villa, and displays the counted number of prize balls. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a specific area passing command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S405.

  In S404, the sub CPU 71 executes a V winning notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data indicating that the player has won V in the jackpot gaming state, that is, the transition to the ST mode after the jackpot gaming state ends. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an inter-round display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that an inter-round display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that an inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S407.

  In S406, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round effect process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting effect data corresponding to the interval display time between rounds, for example. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished. In the hit effect pattern determination process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 91, when a live bonus is determined as the hit effect pattern and this live bonus is executed, priority is given to the execution of the live bonus, and an interval display between rounds is displayed. Production data according to time is configured not to be set.

  In S407, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received a command display during opening of a special winning opening as a read command, it moves the process to S409. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the winning prize opening opening display command as the read command, it moves the process to S410 in FIG.

  In S408, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for displaying the remaining number of possible winnings in the round and the big winning opening opening time. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S409 of FIG. 81, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a hit end display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S410. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S411.

  In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. This winning end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a gaming state command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S412. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S413.

  In S412, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect mode change process. In this process, if the received game state command is a command indicating the probability change / short time game state, the sub CPU 71 sets “03H” to the value of the effect mode flag, and indicates a non-probability change / short time game state. Yes, if the remaining number of time reductions is 100, the command mode flag is set to “02H” to indicate a non-probability change / short time gaming state, and if the remaining number of time reductions is 4 times Then, “01H” is set to the value of the effect mode flag, and if it is a command indicating other, processing of setting “00H” to the value of the effect mode flag is performed. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S413, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a short time end command is received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received a short time end command as the read command, it moves the process to S414. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the time-shutdown command as the read command, it moves the process to S415.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 executes a time saving mode end process. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 performs a process such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easy to select an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the time reduction mode. Do. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S415, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a probability change end command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation end command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S416. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation end command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S417.

  In S416, the sub CPU 71 executes an ST mode end process. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 performs a process such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easy to select an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation level for a predetermined number of games after the end of the ST mode. Do. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In S417, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a discharge error command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that a discharge error command has been received as the read command, it moves the process to S418. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a discharge error command has not been received as the read command, it moves the process to S419.

  In S418, the sub CPU 71 executes a discharge error notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for notifying the occurrence of an error in the second big prize opening 37. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

  In step S419, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is finished, the command analysis processing routine is finished.

[Direction pattern determination processing]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an effect pattern as the effect contents, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in S430, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”. The effect mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode “00H”, a value corresponding to the short mode “01H”, a value corresponding to the long mode “02H”, and a value corresponding to the ST mode. “03H”. Depending on the value of such an effect mode flag, the background image and the effect contents differ. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “03H”, the process proceeds to S431. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “03H”, the process proceeds to S432.

  In S431, the sub CPU 71 executes a process during the ST mode. This ST mode processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S441.

  In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the item pre-reading effect flag indicating that the item pre-reading effect is being executed is ON. If it is determined that the item pre-reading effect flag is on (ON), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if it is determined that the item pre-reading effect flag is not on (ON), the process proceeds to S434.

  In S433, the sub CPU 71 executes item prefetch effect processing. This item prefetch effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S441.

  In S434, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “02H”, the process proceeds to S435. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “02H”, the process proceeds to S436.

  In S435, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process during the long mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a long mode medium effect presentation determination table (not shown) and determines the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the sub effect selection random number range (lottery value). Based on the above, processing for determining the production pattern is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S439.

  In S436, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S437. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not “01H” (when the value of the effect mode flag is “00H”), the process proceeds to S438.

  In S437, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process during the short mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a short mode medium sub effect content determination table (not shown), and determines the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the sub effect selection random number range (lottery value). Based on the above, processing for determining the production pattern is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S439.

  In S438, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect pattern determination process during the normal mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the sub effect content determination table (partially for normal mode) shown in FIG. 54, and determines the result of the big hit determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the sub effect. Based on the selection random number range (lottery value) and the like, processing for determining the production pattern is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S439.

  In S439, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determined effect pattern is an item pre-read effect in any of the processes of S435, S437, and S438 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the determined effect pattern is an item prefetch effect, the process proceeds to S440. On the other hand, when it determines with the determined production pattern not being an item prefetching production, a process is moved to S441.

  In S440, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) the item pre-reading effect flag in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S441.

  In S441, the sub CPU 71 executes processing for setting effect data according to the determined type of effect pattern. When this process ends, the effect pattern determination process routine ends.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect when receiving the variation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the “pre-reading effect” is performed by the main CPU 61 in the winning effect determination process of S115 of the first start port switch check process shown in FIG. 63 or S125 of the second start port switch check process shown in FIG. When it is determined, the item prefetching effect may be executed. That is, the main CPU 61 may control whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect. In this case, the fluctuation pattern designation command may include information regarding whether or not the “prefetching effect” is performed by the main CPU 61, and the sub CPU 71 relates to whether or not the “prefetching effect” included in the received start winning command is included. Information may be held and the production pattern may be determined with reference to the held information.

  Further, the effect of the item pre-reading effect (for example, the number of plates A to D and the expected degree of each expected degree type) may be determined on the main CPU 61 side. In this case, a variation pattern may be determined for each effect content of the item prefetching effect, and the sub CPU 71 may perform the item prefetching effect based on the content of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern. When the variation pattern is selected, the effect content of the item prefetching effect is determined separately, and the variation pattern designation command including the information of the determined effect content is transmitted, so that the sub CPU 71 performs the item prefetching effect. It is good as well. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect, and also determines the effect content of the item prefetching effect, whether or not the main CPU 61 executes the item prefetching effect. And the sub CPU 71 determines the contents of the effect of the item prefetching, and the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect and also determines the effect of the item prefetching effect. A mode is also included.

  Further, regardless of whether the determining subject is the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71, whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect and the effect contents of the item prefetching effect when the item prefetching effect is executed are different from each other. It is good also as deciding by carrying out, and it is good also as deciding simultaneously by collective drawing. That is, whether or not to execute the item prefetching effect and the effect content of the item prefetching effect when executing the item prefetching effect may be determined by a plurality of processes, or may be determined by one process. .

[Processing during ST mode]
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the ST mode processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The process during ST mode is a process for determining an effect pattern as effect contents during the ST mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is “51”. The management counter during ST is a counter indicating the number of executions of the special symbol game in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is “51”, the process proceeds to S451. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not “51”, the process proceeds to S452.

  In S <b> 451, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting (ON) a ST battle effect control flag indicating that it is an ST mode battle reach section in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S452.

  In S452, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the ST battle effect control flag is ON. If it is determined that the ST battle effect control flag is ON, the process proceeds to S453. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ST battle effect control flag is not ON (ON), the process proceeds to S454.

  In S453, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub effect content determination table for ST battle effect (not shown), and determines the result of the jackpot determination (winning), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the sub effect selection random number range (lottery value). Based on the above, processing for determining the production pattern is performed. When this process is finished, the processing routine during the ST mode is finished.

  In S454, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is “0”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the first special symbol game (first game) in the ST mode. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is “0”, the process proceeds to S455. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not “0”, the process proceeds to S457.

  In S455, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story introduction effect pattern according to the value of the ST middle villa counter. The ST long-stay game counter is a counter that indicates the number of times that a big hit gaming state (for example, during the second special symbol) has been played in the ST mode except for the so-called first win. In the present embodiment, a series of story effects in the story section of the ST mode proceeds in accordance with the number of consecutive hits in the ST mode (the value of the ST-long range counter). The story introduction effect pattern is an effect pattern for setting effect data in which an effect (for example, title display) at the time of introduction of the series of stories is executed at the beginning of the series of story effects. If this process ends, the process moves to S456.

  In S456, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “1” as the initial value of the number of sets. The number of sets is the number of sets of story production currently being executed out of a total of 10 story productions, with 5 games played as a set in the story section of ST mode. It is data which shows. If this process ends, the process moves to S462.

  In S457, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is “1”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the first special symbol game that is the second special symbol game (second game) in the ST mode and the first set of the story effect is started. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is “1”, the process proceeds to S460. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not “1”, the process proceeds to S458.

  In S458, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is “5 × number of sets (however,“ 9 ”or less) +1”. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets the management counter value during ST to “5 × 1 + 1 = 6” (start of the second set), “5 × 2 + 1 = 11” (start of the third set), “5 × 3 + 1 = 16”. (Start of 4th set), “5 × 4 + 1 = 21” (start of 5th set), “5 × 5 + 1 = 26” (start of 6th set), “5 × 6 + 1 = 31” (7th set) Start), “5 × 7 + 1 = 36” (start of the eighth set), “5 × 8 + 1 = 41” (start of the ninth set), “5 × 9 + 1 = 46” (start of the tenth set) Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is those values, the process proceeds to S459. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not these values, the process proceeds to S461.

  In step S459, the sub CPU 71 performs update processing for the number of sets by adding 1 to the number of sets. If this process ends, the process moves to S460.

  In S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining a story effect pattern according to the number of sets (“1” to “9”) and the value of the ST middle villa counter. By performing the processing in this way, a series of story effects progress in the story section of the ST mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S461.

  In S461, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the change results in a big hit. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the current symbol variation is to finally stop and display the big hit symbol. If it is determined that the change is a big hit, the process proceeds to S463. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change does not result in a big hit, the process proceeds to S462.

  In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs an updating process of the management counter during ST that adds 1 to the value of the management counter during ST. When this process is finished, the processing routine during the ST mode is finished.

  In S463, the sub CPU 71 executes a story effect pattern change process during ST. The story effect pattern changing process during ST will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the processing routine during the ST mode is finished.

[Story production pattern change processing during ST]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the during-ST story effect pattern change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This during-ST story effect pattern change process is a process for changing the effect pattern as the effect contents when a big hit is made in the story section of the ST mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in S470, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for calculating the remaining effect time of one set of basic effect times from the value of the management counter during ST. Here, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination in the story section in the ST mode (ST gaming state) is lost is basically set to 2 s (2000 ms). ing. In other words, in the ST mode story section, when the big hit determination result is a loss, the first variation pattern corresponding to the first variation time (2 s) is determined with high probability. . Further, the basic effect time for one set (5 special symbol games) in the story section of the ST mode is set to 10 s (10000 ms). That is, the story production corresponding to the value of the number of sets is advanced with the basic production time (10 s) obtained by multiplying the first variation time (2 s) by a predetermined number of games (5 times corresponding to one set). .

  When the value of the management counter during ST indicates the first game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter during ST is “1” or “6”), the sub CPU 71 determines that the value is 10 s (10 s−0 s). Is calculated as the remaining effect time, and if the second game in the set (for example, the value of the management counter during ST is “2”, “7”), the remaining effect time is 8 s (10 s−2 s). When the third game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter during ST is “3”, “8”) is calculated, 6s (10s-4s) is calculated as the remaining effect time, When the fourth game in one set (for example, the value of the management counter during ST is “4”, “9”) is calculated, 4s (10s-6s) is calculated as the remaining effect time, and 5 in one set. Game eyes ( Eg to "5" value in ST management counter, when it indicates a "10") calculates 2s the (10s-8s) as the remaining effect time. That is, the sub CPU 71 calculates the remaining effect time with respect to the basic effect time according to the remaining number of games in one set. If this process ends, the process moves to S471.

  In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating the remaining effect time of one set of the basic effect time from the value of the management counter during ST. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An in-set counter that counts the number of games (or the number of effects) may be provided, and a process of calculating (selecting) the remaining effect time of one set of basic effect times from the value of the counter in the set may be performed. For example, if the value of the in-set counter indicates the first game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is “1”), the sub CPU 71 calculates (selects) 10s as the remaining effect time. When the second game in one set (for example, the value of the counter in the set is “2”) is calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time, and the third game in the one set (for example, If the in-set counter value is “3”), 6s is calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time, and the fourth game in the set (for example, the in-set counter value is “4”). 4s is calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time, and when it indicates the fifth game in one set (for example, the value of the in-set counter is “5”), 2s It may be calculated (selected) as the remaining effect time.

  In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is the same as the variation time determined in the variation. For example, if the remaining effect time is 6 s (6000 ms) and the variation time is 6 s (6000 ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining effect time and the variation time are the same. If it is determined that the remaining effect time and the variation time are the same, the process proceeds to S472. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining effect time and the variation time are not the same, the process proceeds to S473.

  In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the big hit notification effect data at the end of the setting. The jackpot notification effect data at the end of the set is effect data for notifying that a transition to the jackpot gaming state is made in synchronization with the end of the currently executing set in the story section of the ST mode. In this way, when the remaining production time and the variation time are the same, the story production in the set is executed as usual until the currently running set ends, and a big hit occurs at the end of the current running set. It is announced. In addition, without setting the jackpot notification effect data at the end of the set (that is, not announced by the dedicated effect that the big hit), it was a big hit by the combination pattern of the decorative pattern at the end of the set May be announced. When this process is finished, the during-ST story effect pattern change process routine is finished.

  In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 is longer than the change time determined in the change. For example, if the remaining effect time is 8 s (8000 ms) and the change time is 6 s (6000 ms), the sub CPU 71 determines that the remaining effect time is longer than the change time. If it is determined that the remaining effect time is longer than the variation time, the process proceeds to S474. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining presentation time is not longer than the fluctuation time (the remaining presentation time is shorter than the fluctuation time), the process proceeds to S475.

  In S474, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of advancing the story effect pattern determined so that the remaining effect time and the variation time are the same. For example, when the remaining performance time is 8 s (8000 ms) and the variation time is 6 s (6000 ms), 8 s (8000 ms) when the story production in the set is executed normally until the currently executing set ends. ) Although necessary, the sub CPU 71 advances the story production in the set so that the story production in the remaining set ends in 6s (6000 ms), and the end of the remaining production time and the end of the fluctuation time are determined. Control to synchronize. After proceeding with the story production in the set, similar to the processing of S472, the big hit announcement production data at the end of the set is set, and the big hit is announced at the end of the currently running set It is good also as doing, and it is good also as setting different production data. Moreover, it is good also as notifying that it was a big hit, and notifying that it was a big hit by the combination aspect of the decoration design at the time of the end of a set. When this process is finished, the during-ST story effect pattern change process routine is finished.

  In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting the remaining effect time calculated in the process of S470 from the variation time to calculate an effectable time. That is, when the remaining presentation time is shorter than the fluctuation time, the sub CPU 71 is a predetermined set after the currently executed set, and the story presentation ends with a big hit at the end of the set. In the production end target set, the production possible time for synchronizing the end of the production end target set and the end of the variation time is calculated. If this process ends, the process moves to S476.

  In S476, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effectable time calculated in the process of S475 is longer than the basic effect time (10s (10000 ms)). For example, if the remaining effect time is 4 s (4000 ms) and the variation time is 30 s (30000 ms), the effectable time is calculated as 26 s (26000 ms). In this case, the sub CPU 71 determines the effectable time (26 s). ) Is determined to be longer than the basic performance time (10 s). If it is determined that the effectable time is longer than the basic effect time, the process proceeds to S477. On the other hand, if it is determined that the available time is not longer than the basic effect time (the available time is shorter than the basic effect time), the process proceeds to S478.

  In S477, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting special effect data during ST that suggests that a big hit is made in the effect end target set. In the present embodiment, when the available production time is longer than the basic production time, the production end target set is a set after the current execution set. In this case, as a so-called premier effect, a big hit suggestion effect (special effect mode) based on special effect data during ST is executed. Note that the process of S477 may be performed without performing the process of S476. That is, even when the production end target set is the next set of the currently executed set, the jackpot suggestive production (special production mode) based on the special production data during ST may be executed. A specific screen display example (effect example) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In S478, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine the set of the story effect pattern following the determined story effect pattern so that the effectable time and the time until the effect end of the effect end target set are the same. For example, when the possible production time is 6 s (6000 ms), the next set of the currently executed set becomes the production end target set, so that the sub CPU 71 performs the story production in the next set that is the production end target set. By determining the story effect pattern that will end in 6 s (6000 ms), control is performed so that the end of the effectable time and the effect end of the effect end target set are synchronized. In addition, after executing the story production in the production end target set, similarly to the processing of S472, the big hit notification production data at the end of the set is set, and the big hit is announced at the end of the production end target set It is good also as doing, and it is good also as setting different production data. Moreover, it is good also as notifying that it was a big hit, and notifying that it was a big hit by the combination aspect of the decoration design at the time of the end of the production end object set. When this process is finished, the during-ST story effect pattern change process routine is finished.

[Item prefetching processing]
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an item prefetch effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item pre-reading effect process is a process when the item pre-reading effect is determined as the effect pattern in the normal mode or the time reduction mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the change is started. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol variation pattern in the current symbol variation is a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command for which the item prefetching effect is determined. If it is determined that the change has started, the process proceeds to S481. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change is not relevant, the process proceeds to S482.

  In S <b> 481, the sub CPU 71 executes an item use effect process for executing effects for using all the plates after acquiring all the plates as items in the change. This item use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the item prefetch effect process routine is finished.

  In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not any one of the plate A, the plate B, the plate C, and the plate D corresponding to the determined item prefetching effect (see FIGS. 54 and 55) is one or more. To do. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process proceeds to S483. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no acquired plate, the item prefetch effect processing routine is terminated.

  In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the special symbol variation pattern is a shortening variation. If it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation, the item prefetch effect processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is not a shortened variation, the process proceeds to S484.

  In S <b> 484, the sub CPU 71 executes an item acquisition effect process for determining whether or not to allow the player to acquire in advance a plate as an item before the change. This item acquisition effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the item prefetch effect process routine is finished.

  As described above, in the item prefetching effect, an item (for example, a plate) may be acquired before the change, or all items (for example, a plate) may be acquired in the change, but before the change, When a shortened variation (for example, a shortened variation with a variation time of 2000 ms) having a relatively shorter variation time than a normal variation (for example, a normal variation with a variation time of 4000 ms) is determined as the special symbol variation pattern The item acquisition effect process is not performed, and items (for example, plates) are not acquired in advance (that is, the prior notification effect in the item acquisition effect process described later is not performed). By configuring in this way, even when an item prefetching effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the balance of the effect from being lost due to the relationship with the change time (particularly the shortening change). In addition, in the predetermined symbol variation before the variation, the normal variation was determined as the special symbol variation pattern. However, depending on the reserved number (for example, when the reserved number is 3 or more), the variation is shortened. Similarly, in the process of S482, it is determined that the special symbol variation pattern is a shortened variation, and the item acquisition effect processing is not performed.

[Item use effect processing]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an item use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item use effect process is a process for executing an effect that basically uses all the plates after acquiring all the plates as items in the variation, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not there is an acquisition plate. That is, the sub CPU 71 has not acquired all the plates even in the item acquisition effect process described later, and plate A, plate B, and plate C corresponding to the determined item prefetch effects (see FIGS. 54 and 55). , And any one of the plates D is determined. If it is determined that there is an acquisition plate, the process proceeds to S491. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no acquired plate, the process proceeds to S492.

  In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting plate acquisition effect data for acquiring all the remaining plates. For example, “item prefetching effect 15” (see FIGS. 54 and 55) is determined, and there are one plate A, one plate B, one plate C, and one plate D as the remaining plates. In this case, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for performing an effect of sequentially acquiring the plates A to D at the start of the change. If this process ends, the process moves to S492.

  In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a pseudo-continuous effect. Basically, decorative symbols start to change in response to the start of changes in special symbols, and stop to change in response to changes in special symbols. The temporary stop / re-variation of only the decorative symbol is an effect that makes it appear as if the symbol variation has been performed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner. The number of temporary stops / revariations of the decorative symbol is the number of pseudo stations (the number of pseudo stations), and the greater the number of pseudo stations, the higher the degree of expectation that is a big hit. For example, when the determined production pattern is “item prefetching production 15”, more specifically, “item prefetching production 15” (pseudo continuous production data = pseudo station number 0) to “item prefetching production” 15 ”(pseudo continuous effect data = pseudo continuous number of 4 times) can be determined. That is, even if it is the same “item look-ahead effect 15” on the description of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns having different pseudo-continuous numbers (0 to 4 times). However, from the viewpoint of achieving consistency in the production, when the pseudo-continuous number is 0, the production pattern of the item prefetching production in which the number of plates A is one or more is not determined. Thus, in S492, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern having a pseudo-continuous number of 1 or more has been determined. If it is determined that there is a pseudo-continuous effect, the process proceeds to S493. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no pseudo-continuous effect, the process proceeds to S496.

  In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the plate A has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S495.

  In S494, the sub CPU 71 executes plate A use effect processing. This plate A use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S496.

  In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting pseudo continuous effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs control so that a pseudo-continuous effect corresponding to a predetermined pseudo-continuous number (0 to 4 times) is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S496.

  In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a speech effect. The serif effect is an effect of displaying a serif of a predetermined character on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during the change of the special symbol, and the expectation that is a big hit is changed depending on the color of the serif. Is. As an example, it is assumed that the expectation that is a big hit in the order of serif (white), serif (yellow), serif (green), serif (red) increases. For example, when the determined production pattern is “item prefetching production 15”, more specifically, “item prefetching production 15” (no line production data = no dialogue production data), “item prefetching production 15”. It is possible to determine any of (line effect data = line (white)) to “item look-ahead effect 15” (line effect data = line (red)). In other words, even if it is the same “item prefetching effect 15” in the description of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns with different presence and color of the line effect. However, from the viewpoint of achieving consistency in the production, when there is no line production, the production pattern of the item prefetching production in which the number of plates B is one or more is not determined. In this way, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern having a speech effect has been determined. If it is determined that there is a line effect, the process proceeds to S497. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no line production, the process proceeds to S500.

  In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for determining whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process proceeds to S498. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S499.

  In S498, the sub CPU 71 executes plate B use effect processing. The plate B use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S500.

  In S499, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the speech effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs control so that a speech effect corresponding to a predetermined color of the speech effect is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S500.

  In S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a cut-in effect. The cut-in effect is an effect in which a predetermined character is cut in and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during the change of the special symbol, and the expectation that is a big hit differs depending on the color of the cut-in. Is displayed. As an example, it is assumed that the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the order of cut-in (white), cut-in (yellow), cut-in (green), and cut-in (red) increases. For example, when the determined effect pattern is “item prefetch effect 15”, more specifically, “item prefetch effect 15” (no cut-in effect data = no cut-in effect), “item prefetch effect” 15 ”(cut-in effect data = cut-in (white)) to“ item look-ahead effect 15 ”(cut-in effect data = cut-in (red)) can be determined. In other words, even if it is the same “item look-ahead effect 15” in the description of the effect pattern, there are effect patterns having different presence / absence and color of the cut-in effect. However, from the viewpoint of achieving consistency in the production, when there is no cut-in production, the production pattern of the item prefetching production in which the number of plates C is one or more is not determined. In this way, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an effect pattern having a cut-in effect has been determined. If it is determined that there is a cut-in effect, the process proceeds to S501. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no cut-in effect, the process proceeds to S504.

  In step S501, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process proceeds to S502. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S503.

  In S502, the sub CPU 71 executes plate C use effect processing. The plate C use effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S504.

  In step S503, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting cut-in effect data predetermined by the effect pattern. In other words, the sub CPU 71 performs control so that a cut-in effect corresponding to a predetermined color of the cut-in effect is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S504.

  In S504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S506.

  In S505, the sub CPU 71 executes plate D use effect processing. The plate D is configured to have a higher probability of being relatively acquired when the result of the big hit determination (winning) is a win than when it is a loss (see FIGS. 54 and 55). The expectation that it is a big hit only by having acquired is high. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the winning effect pattern, which will be described later with reference to FIG. When the plate D is carried over so that the plate D is used in the process, the process of carrying over the plate D can be performed. In other cases, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting special effect change data. As for the special effect change data, the plate D is directly or indirectly applied to the effect data set in the process of S494 (FIG. 87), S495, S498 (FIG. 88), S499, S502 (FIG. 89), or S503. This is data for changing the performance to be performed so that the degree of expectation is higher. For example, even if it is determined that there is a cut-in effect and it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the cut-in effect data predetermined by the effect pattern is converted to S502 (FIG. The process is changed in the same manner as the process 89). At that time, an effect of directly using the plate D may be performed, or an effect of converting the plate D into the plate C may be performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S506.

  In addition, the aspect of the effect change based on the special effect change data is not limited to the above-described aspect. As an example, it is also possible to adopt a mode of changing the production so that it is notified that a big hit has been made by a variable display mode and a stop display mode different from the normal display variation display mode and stop display mode. For example, in a predetermined production mode (including the production mode in the variation of the item look-ahead production), first, the reach state is reached, and then the production occurs (develops) before the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, and the super reach state After that, when it is a big hit, the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a specific display mode, and when it is not a big hit, it is configured to stop and display at a reach lose eye. If it is a big hit in the fluctuation, the special effect change data is set (that is, the plate D has been acquired), and it is originally a predetermined effect. In the aspect, where the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display manner, the decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed at the reach of the reach, and then When the effect of starting the normal fluctuation of the next game is performed, the effect of using the plate D is performed, and the effect may be changed so that the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. Good. Furthermore, as another example, when there are a plurality of super reach states with different expectations, the degree of expectation is further increased based on the fact that the special effect change data is set (that is, the plate D is acquired). The production may be changed so as to generate a high super reach state.

  In step S506, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the acquired number of plates. Further, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (OFF) the item pre-reading effect flag. When this process ends, the item use effect process routine ends.

[Plate A use effect processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the plate A use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The plate A use effect process is a process for executing the pseudo-continuous effect in the fluctuation by causing the acquired plate A to act, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in S510, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous number is larger than the number of acquired plates A. For example, if the pseudo-continuous number is three and the number of acquired plates A is two, the sub CPU 71 determines that the pseudo-continuous number is larger than the acquired number of plates A. If it is determined that the number of pseudo stations is greater than the number of acquired plates A, the process proceeds to S511. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of pseudo-runs is not larger than the number of plates A acquired (the number of pseudo-runs is equal to or less than the number of plates A acquired), the process proceeds to S512.

  In S <b> 511, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data of the pseudo continuous temporary stop. A screen display example (effect example) of a pseudo-continuous stop effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. If this process ends, the process moves to S513.

  In S512, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the effect data for the normal temporary stop, the effect data for using the plate A, and the effect data for the pseudo continuous temporary stop. A screen display example (effect example) of the effect of using the temporary stop and the plate A will be described later with reference to FIGS. If this process ends, the process moves to S513.

  In S513, the sub CPU 71 performs a process for updating the pseudo-run number by subtracting 1 from the pseudo-run number. If this process ends, the process moves to S514.

  In S <b> 514, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo station number is “0”. If it is determined that the pseudo-continuous number is “0”, the plate A use effect processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-continuous number is not “0”, the process proceeds to S510.

[Plate B use effect processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a plate B use effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This plate B use effect process is a process for causing the acquired plate B to act to execute a line effect in the fluctuation, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in S520, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of provisionally setting serif effect data having a lower expectation than the serif effect data determined in advance according to the number of plates B. For example, if the predetermined line effect data is red (red) and the number of plates B is one, the sub CPU 71 sets the line (green) that is low in expectation level for one plate B. Is temporarily set. Further, for example, if the predetermined line effect data is the line (red) and the number of plates B is two, the sub CPU 71 sets the line (the line effect data that is low in expectation for two plates B). (Yellow) is temporarily set. If this process ends, the process moves to S521.

  In S <b> 521, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the temporarily set speech effect data with low expectation, the effect data using the plate B, and the original speech effect data. By setting these effect data, if the number of plates B is one in the above example, the effect corresponding to the serif effect data of the first line (green) is executed, and then the plate B It is informed that the effect corresponding to the effect data using one sheet is executed and the expectation level of the serif effect is increased, and finally the effect corresponding to the serif effect data of the line (red) is executed. In the above example, when the number of plates B is two, an effect corresponding to the serif (yellow) serif effect data is executed first, and then corresponding to the effect data using two plates B. It is informed that the expectation of the line production is increased and the production corresponding to the line production data of the line (red) is finally executed. That is, it is possible to perform an effect as if the expectation of the line effect is improved by the action of the plate B. When this process is finished, the plate B use effect process routine is finished.

[Plate C use effect processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing plate C use effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This plate C use effect process is a process for executing the cut-in effect in the fluctuation by causing the acquired plate C to act, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in S530, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of provisionally setting cut-in effect data having a lower expectation than the cut-in effect data determined in advance according to the number of plates C. For example, when the predetermined cut-in effect data is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is one, the sub CPU 71 has cut-in effect data that is low in expectation for one plate C. Temporarily set in (green). Further, for example, when the predetermined cut-in effect data is cut-in (red) and the number of plates C is two, the sub CPU 71 uses cut-in effect data with a low expectation level for two plates C. Temporarily set a cut-in (yellow). If this process ends, the process moves to S531.

  In step S521, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the temporarily set cut-in effect data with low expectation, the effect data using the plate C, and the original cut-in effect data. By setting these effect data, when the number of plates C is one in the above example, the effect corresponding to the cut-in (green) cut-in effect data is executed first, and then The effect corresponding to the effect data using one plate C is executed, and it is notified that the expectation level of the cut-in effect is increased, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in (red) cut-in effect data is executed. The In the above example, when the number of plates C is two, an effect corresponding to cut-in (yellow) cut-in effect data is executed first, and then corresponding to effect data using two plates C. It is notified that the expectation level of the cut-in effect is increased by executing the effect to be performed, and finally the effect corresponding to the cut-in effect data of cut-in (red) is executed. That is, it is possible to produce an effect as if the expectation of the cut-in effect is improved by the action of the plate C. When this process is finished, the plate C use effect process routine is finished.

[Item acquisition effect processing]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an item acquisition effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This item acquisition effect process is a process for executing an effect that causes the player to acquire a plate as an item before the change, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in S540, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate A has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate A has been acquired, the process proceeds to S541. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S544. In S <b> 541, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate A display lottery for determining whether or not to display an effect image indicating that the plate A has been acquired in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S542.

  In S542, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the plate A display lottery is won. If it is determined that the plate A display lottery is won, the process proceeds to S543. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate A display lottery is not won, the process proceeds to S544.

  In step S <b> 543, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the number of plates A by subtracting 1 from the number of plates A. In addition, when there are a plurality of plates A, it may be determined whether to display one plate at a time by the above-described plate A display lottery, or to determine whether to display a plurality of plates A. It is good. In the latter case, the number of plates A is subtracted in this process. If this process ends, the process moves to S544.

  In S544, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate B has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate B has been acquired, the process proceeds to S545. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S548.

  In S545, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate B display lottery for determining whether or not to display an effect image indicating that the plate B has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S546.

  In S546, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the plate B display lottery is won. If it is determined that the plate B display lottery is won, the process proceeds to S547. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate B display lottery is not won, the process proceeds to S548.

  In step S547, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the number of plate B by subtracting 1 from the number of plate B. In addition, when there are a plurality of plates B, it may be determined whether or not one plate B is displayed one by one by the above-mentioned plate B display lottery, and whether or not a plurality of plates B are displayed is determined. It is good. In the latter case, the number of plates B is subtracted in this process. If this process ends, the process moves to S548.

  In S548, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate C has been acquired, the process proceeds to S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S552.

  In S549, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate C display lottery for determining whether or not to display an effect image indicating that the plate C has been acquired in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S550.

  In S550, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate C display lottery is won. If it is determined that the plate C display lottery is won, the process proceeds to S551. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate C display lottery is not won, the process proceeds to S552.

  In step S551, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the number of plates C by subtracting 1 from the number of plates C. In addition, when there are a plurality of plates C, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-described lottery of the plate C display, and it is determined whether or not to display a plurality of plates C. It is good. In the latter case, the number of plates C is subtracted in this process. If this process ends, the process moves to S552. In step S552, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S553. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the process proceeds to S556.

  In S <b> 553, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of executing a plate D display lottery for determining whether or not to display an effect image indicating that the plate D has been acquired in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. If this process ends, the process moves to S554.

  In S554, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the plate D display lottery is won. If it is determined that the plate D display lottery is won, the process proceeds to S555. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D display lottery is not won, the process proceeds to S556.

  In step S555, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the number of plate D by subtracting 1 from the number of plate D. In addition, when there are a plurality of plates D, it may be determined whether or not to display one plate at a time by the above-described plate D display lottery, and it is determined whether or not to display a plurality of plates D. It is good. In the latter case, the number of plates D is subtracted in this process. If this process ends, the process moves to S556.

  In S556, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting plate display effect data corresponding to the plate won in the display lottery (S541, S545, S549, S553). Based on this plate display effect data, the number of target plates won in each display lottery described above is displayed as an effect image in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the item acquisition effect processing routine ends.

  Here, as an example of acquiring a plate (item) by the item acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 91, it is determined that the item use effect process shown in FIG. 86 is executed in the special symbol game after three games. An example will be described in which the plates A to D are acquired one by one (when the special symbol game after 3 games is the change).

  In the special symbol game of the first game (two games before the change), for example, when winning the plate A display lottery and the plate D display lottery, an effect image indicating that one plate A has been acquired, and An effect image indicating that one plate D has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4 </ b> A of the liquid crystal display device 4. Next, in the special symbol game of the second game (one game before the change), for example, when the plate B display lottery is won, an effect image indicating that one plate B is acquired is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Are displayed in the display area 4A. And, in the special symbol game of the third game (the variation), one plate C has been acquired for the remaining plates C that were not shown to have been acquired by the item acquisition effect process shown in FIG. Is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 (see S491 in FIG. 86), and an item pre-reading effect using these plates (items) is performed.

  Thus, in this embodiment, before the said fluctuation | variation is started, prior notification production | presentation (for example, plate AD) which alert | reports the kind of item (for example, plate AD) in item prefetching production is acquired. It is configured to determine whether or not to perform an effect image indicating that there is. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a more varied look-ahead effect (an effect based on the start-up memory before the execution of change) when performing a jackpot notice (a notice of transition to a specific gaming state). .

[Performance pattern determination process]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The winning effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a winning effect pattern that is an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 91, in S560, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning effect pattern flag indicates the winning pattern 12. Here, the hit effect pattern flags are internal flags indicating the hit patterns 1 to 12 (see FIG. 50), and the hit effect pattern flags “01H” to “0CH” are set corresponding to the hit patterns 1 to 12, respectively. Is done. The winning effect pattern flag may be set according to the information of the big hit symbol included in the received symbol designation command, or set according to the same information included in the received winning start display command. It is good. That is, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the type of jackpot to be started is the hit pattern 12 (the jackpot symbol “probability 1” of the second special symbol). If it is determined that the winning effect pattern flag indicates the winning pattern 12, the process proceeds to S561. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning effect pattern flag does not indicate the winning pattern 12, the process proceeds to S566.

  In S561, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the ST mode is being performed. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag described above is “03H”. If it is determined that it is in the ST mode, the process proceeds to S563. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ST mode is not being executed, the process proceeds to S562.

  In S562, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining an SP bonus promotion effect pattern. When the winning effect pattern flag indicates the winning pattern 12 and is not in the ST mode, basically the big special symbol “probability change 1” of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the time reduction mode. Then, the SP bonus promotion effect pattern indicating that the transition from the time reduction mode to the ST mode via the SP bonus during the second special symbol (promotion) is indicated in the SP bonus is determined. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

  In S563, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the management counter during ST is “50” or less. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the big hit has been made in the story section in the ST mode (whether or not the big hit has been extended). If it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is “50” or less, the process proceeds to S564. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the management counter during ST is not “50” or less, the process proceeds to S565.

  In S564, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an effect pattern per SP bonus related story according to the value of the ST extended counter and the value of the management counter during ST. In this embodiment, a series of story productions in the story section of the ST mode progress according to the number of consecutive hits in the ST mode (the value of the ST during the ST range). The series of story productions that are being carried out are also inherited when shifting from the story section of the ST mode to the SP bonus for the second special symbol. Therefore, per SP bonus related story according to the number of consecutive hits in ST mode (the value of the ST during the ST) and the progress of the story in the ST section (the value of the management counter during ST). The production pattern is decided. A screen display example (effect example) of an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

  In S565, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining an effect pattern per SP bonus battle. The SP bonus battle per effect pattern is a hit effect pattern determined when a big hit is made in the ST mode battle reach section, and one character (for example, an ally character) in the ST mode battle reach section and others This is a hit effect pattern for executing an effect related to the battle scene of the character (for example, an enemy character) in the SP bonus. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

  In S566, the sub CPU 71 refers to the winning effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) and performs a process of determining the winning effect pattern according to the type of the winning pattern indicated by the winning effect pattern flag. In addition, as described above, when determining the hit effect pattern according to the type of the more detailed hit pattern (for example, the hit patterns 1-1 to 46), the hit effect pattern flag is specified in more detail. Alternatively, the winning effect pattern may be determined according to the winning effect pattern flag and other information indicating a more detailed winning pattern. If this process ends, the process moves to S567.

  In S567, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the plate D has been acquired. More specifically, in the plate D use effect process of S505 of the item use effect process shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not the number of plates D carried over is one or more. If it is determined that the plate D has been acquired, the process proceeds to S568. On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate D has not been acquired, the winning effect pattern determination processing routine is terminated.

  In S568, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the winning effect pattern so as to be a promoted (reverse) pattern according to the determined type of the winning pattern. For example, when a live bonus (successful live bonus 9R) is determined as the winning effect pattern and the plate D is acquired, a live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is provisionally set as the effect pattern. Then, the processing is performed to set the effect data corresponding to the temporarily set live bonus (live bonus 4R failure), the effect data using the plate D, and the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 9R successful). By setting these effect data, in the live bonus, the effect corresponding to the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 4R failure) is executed first, and then in the first branch section to be described later. It is informed that an effect corresponding to the effect data using the plate D is executed and the live bonus is promoted (reversed), and thereafter an effect corresponding to the effect data corresponding to the live bonus (live bonus 9R success) is executed. The hit production pattern is changed as follows. When this process is finished, the winning effect pattern determination process routine is finished.

[Winning start effect processing]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The winning start effect process is a process for starting an effect in the big hit gaming state based on the determined winning effect pattern, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in S570, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music pattern (see FIG. 56) is determined as the winning effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to start a live bonus for the first special symbol. If it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the winning effect pattern, the process proceeds to S571. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music pattern is not determined as the winning effect pattern, the process proceeds to S572.

  In step S <b> 571, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting an effective period timer according to the start timing of an initial section described later of the determined music pattern. That is, when the music pattern is determined as the winning effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 performs control to start the effect based on the music pattern from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit gaming state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10,000 ms, 4000 ms is set as the valid period timer. Note that examples of musical pattern effects and screen display examples will be described later with reference to FIGS. 94, 53, 55, and 56. When this process ends, the hit start effect process routine ends.

  In S572, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting an effective period timer according to the time corresponding to the hit start interval time. That is, when the music pattern is not determined as the winning effect pattern, the sub CPU 71 performs control for starting the effect based on the winning effect pattern so as to be synchronized with the start of the big hit gaming state. For example, when the hit start interval time is 10000 ms, 10000 ms is set as the valid period timer. When this process ends, the hit start effect process routine ends.

[Ending effect processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The winning end effect process is a process for ending the effect in the big hit gaming state based on the determined winning effect pattern, and is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in S580, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning effect pattern flag indicates a certain change. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the type of jackpot to be ended is a hit pattern 1-6 (first special symbol big hit symbol “probability 1” to “probability 6”) or a hit pattern 12 (second special symbol big hit symbol “probability 1”. )). If it is determined that the winning effect pattern flag indicates a certain change, the process proceeds to S581. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning effect pattern flag does not indicate a certain change, the process proceeds to S585.

  In S <b> 581, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ST extended range counter is “1” or more. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the big hit has been made in the ST mode (whether the big hit has been extended). If it is determined that the value of the ST extended range counter is “1” or more, the process proceeds to S582. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST middle villa counter is not "1" or more ("0"), the process proceeds to S583.

  In S582, the sub CPU 71 performs an update process of the ST extended range counter that adds 1 to the ST extended range counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S584.

  In S583, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “1” as an initial value of the ST extended range counter. As a result, the first series of story effects is performed in the story section of the ST mode after the end of the first hit. If this process ends, the process moves to S584.

  In the present embodiment, the number of extended resorts excluding the so-called first hit is counted using the ST extended-resort counter, but the number of extended resorts including the first hit may be separately counted. . In this case, a villa counter that counts the number of villas including the initial hit may be provided separately, and from the value of the ST villa counter (for example, 1 is added to the value of the ST villa counter). The number of consecutive resorts including the first hit may be counted. Thus, by counting the number of consecutive resorts including the first hit, the count result may be displayed separately from a series of story effects. For example, when the above-mentioned first series of story productions are performed, the game is displayed regardless of the production contents by displaying “2 consecutive big hits” as the display of the number of consecutive resorts including the first hit. It is possible to make the player roughly grasp the number of game media acquired.

  In S584, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” as the initial value of the management counter during ST. As a result, the number of games in the so-called ST mode story section is managed from the beginning. If this process ends, the process moves to S585.

  In S585, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music pattern (see FIG. 56) is determined as the winning effect pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is the end of the live bonus during the first special symbol. If it is determined that the music pattern is determined as the winning effect pattern, the winning end effect processing routine is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music pattern is not determined as the winning effect pattern, the process proceeds to S586.

  In S586, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data at the end of the bonus according to the type of the hit effect pattern. Here, when the winning effect pattern is a music pattern, if the effect corresponding to the music pattern started in the winning start effect process (see FIG. 92) has not ended, the effect is executed with priority. The production data at the end of the bonus is not set. That is, the effect according to the music pattern is not overwritten with the effect at the end of the bonus. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

  Although not shown in the drawing, in the hit end effect process, the sub CPU 71 operates the return button 24 to return a card (for example, a prepaid card) from the card unit 84 at the end of the so-called first hit. The process of setting the card forget-not-notifying effect data for executing the card-forget-notifying notification that prompts the player to perform is performed. This forgetting card removal may be executed together with the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus, and at the end of the so-called first hit, it is executed instead of the effect corresponding to the effect data at the end of the bonus. It is also good to do. In addition, even if the winning effect pattern is a music pattern and the effect by the music pattern is not ended at the end of the so-called first hit, the card forgetting notification may be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 113, various effects in the present embodiment will be described using an effect example and a screen display example.

[Example of live bonus production]
93 and 94 are diagrams showing examples of live bonus effects. 93 and 94 show examples of effects in the case of the music pattern A as an example of a live bonus.

  The upper part of FIG. 94 shows an effect example when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 and the live bonus music pattern A (success) is selected as the hit effect pattern. In the music pattern A (success), the initial pattern (6s) in which the intro part in the music pattern A is output, the first period (22s) in which the A melody part in the music pattern A is output, and the music pattern A continue. The first branch section (7s) that first indicates whether or not, the second section (22s) in which the B melody portion in the music pattern A is output, and the second that indicates whether or not the music pattern A continues. It consists of a branch section (9 s) and a third section (25 s) in which a chorus part in the music pattern A is output and a specific second round game is suggested to be executed. In addition, the output time shown in parentheses in each section (including the fourth section and the fifth section described later) is an example, and the average digestion time for each round (long release or short release), between rounds The time corresponding to the interval and the music tone of the music corresponding to the music pattern can be set as appropriate.

  In the music pattern A (success), the intro part that is the initial common part of the predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit gaming state, and then the predetermined music piece is synchronized with the start of the big hit gaming state. The A melody part, which is the first common part, is output, and then it is shown whether or not the output of the predetermined music continues in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3R. Next, the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined music piece, is output from the middle stage of the 4R, and then in a specific branch period (second branch section) starting from the early stage of the 7R. Whether or not the output of the music is continued is shown, and then the rust portion which is a specific portion of the predetermined music is output from the middle stage of the 8R.

  The lower part of FIG. 94 shows an effect example when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 7 and the live bonus music pattern A (failure) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) includes the initial section (6s), the first section (22s), the first branch section (7s), the second section (22s), and the first section (22s). The second branch section (9s) and the fourth section (13s) in which the chorus part in the music pattern A is not output and the specific second round game is suggested not to be executed.

  In the music pattern A (failure) when the winning pattern is the winning pattern 7, an intro part that is an initial common part of a predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit gaming state. The A melody part which is the first common part of the predetermined music is output so as to synchronize with the start, and then in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3R, the predetermined music Whether the output continues or not is indicated, then the B melody part, which is the second common part of the predetermined music piece, is output from the middle stage of the 4R, and then the specific branch starting from the early stage of the 7R In the period (second branch section), it is indicated whether or not the output of the predetermined music continues. Next, the chorus part that is the specific part of the predetermined music is not output from the middle of the 8R, and the second specified Show that round games will not run That.

  The upper part of FIG. 95 shows an effect example when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 3 and the live bonus music pattern A (reverse) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (reverse) has a specific second round game in which a predetermined sound is output from the initial section (6s), the first section (22s), and the first branch section (7s). It consists of a fifth section (13s) suggested to be executed. The predetermined sound output in the fifth section may be a rust portion in the music pattern A (that is, the third section and the fifth section may be the same), and the other sounds in the music pattern A It may be a part (for example, a C melody part), or may be a specific sound effect related to a predetermined musical piece indicating that it has been reversed (a specific second round game is executed). Moreover, after this specific sound effect is output, you may output a chorus part or a part of other part.

  In the music pattern A (reverse rotation), an intro part, which is an initial common part of a predetermined music, is output from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit gaming state, and then the predetermined music piece is synchronized with the start of the big hit gaming state. The A melody part, which is the first common part, is output, and then it is shown whether or not the output of the predetermined music continues in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3R. Next, a predetermined sound that is a specific part of a predetermined music is output from the middle of the 4th R.

  The lower part of FIG. 94 shows an effect example when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8 and the live bonus music pattern A (failure) is selected as the hit effect pattern. The music pattern A (failure) is composed of the initial section (6s), the first section (22s), the first branch section (7s), and the fourth section (13s). Yes.

  In the music pattern A (failure) when the hit pattern is the hit pattern 8, the intro part which is the initial common part of the predetermined music is output from a predetermined time before the start of the big hit gaming state, and then the big hit gaming state The A melody part which is the first common part of the predetermined music is output so as to synchronize with the start, and then in the predetermined branch period (first branch section) starting from the end of the 3R, the predetermined music It is shown whether or not the output continues, and next, a specific sound that is a specific part of the predetermined music is not output from the middle stage of the 4R, indicating that the specific second round game is not executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a predetermined music piece is used in both the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3 in which the specific second round game is executed and in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 8 in which the specific second round game is not executed. A first common portion (for example, A melody in the first section) of the music (for example, music corresponding to the music pattern A) is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is allowed to pass. Then, in the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 3, after the elapse of the predetermined branch period, a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) that suggests that the specific second round game is executed. Output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation in the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state).

  Further, in the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music is started at a predetermined time (for example, 1R at which the initial section is started) By configuring so that the output of a predetermined music (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from the waiting time before the start of the eyes, it is not necessary to monitor the round game, thereby increasing the control burden Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in any of the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, the big hit game state of the hit pattern 8, the big hit game state of the hit pattern 1, and the big hit game state of the hit pattern 7 (for example, A first common part (for example, A melody in the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is passed. Here, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 3, a specific portion of a predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the elapse of the predetermined branch period. In the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 1 and the big hit gaming state of the hit pattern 7, the second common part (for example, the B melody in the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period (For example, the second branch section) is allowed to elapse. Then, in the big hit game state of the hit pattern 1, a specific portion (for example, rust of the third section) of a predetermined music suggesting that the specific second round game is executed after the elapse of the specific branch period. Output. With this configuration, the player's expectation in the specific gaming state can be further enhanced.

  The music pattern B (success) and the music pattern C (determined) basically have the same configuration as the music pattern A (success), and the music pattern B (reverse) is basically the music pattern A (reverse). The music pattern B (failure) is basically the same as the music pattern A (failure), but a part or all of the output time of each section specified is different from the output time. It is good also as comprising so that it may be comprised, and it is good also as comprising so that a one part area may not be provided among each prescribed | regulated area.

  In addition, for example, in the first branch section and / or the second branch section, an effect of prompting the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A may be performed. Based on the pressing operation button 9A being operated a predetermined number of times The part of the predetermined music corresponding to the section following the section may be output earlier than when the pressing button 9A is not operated a predetermined number of times.

[Example of normal screen display]
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a normal screen display. The normal time here means the time of execution of the effect mode such as the normal mode or the time reduction mode. As shown in the figure, on the screen of the display area 4A in the normal state, basically, a plurality of decorative symbols 700, first reserved number information 701 corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol Second reserved number information 702 corresponding to the symbol start memory is displayed.

  The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are, for example, arranged in three columns, and the numerical symbols “1” to “7” are displayed in a variable display mode or a stop display mode in each column. The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in conjunction with a special symbol variation display and a stop display. When the plurality of decorative symbols 700 shift from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, basically, the decorative symbols 700 are in the stop display mode in a state where all of them are arranged in the same numeric symbol from the variable display mode. The stop display mode of the decorative symbols 700 other than these is basically lost.

  The first reserved number information 701 and the second reserved number information 702 are displayed by the reserved marks corresponding to the reserved numbers corresponding to the start memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Up to four upper limit marks indicating the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are additionally displayed according to the winning of the game balls to the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, respectively. The hold mark indicating the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 is displayed when the decorative symbol starts to be displayed together with the special symbol based on the start memory of the corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol, respectively. It disappears from the right end and disappears. When both of the hold marks of the first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are displayed, the start memory of the second special symbol has priority over the start memory of the first special symbol. 2 The hold mark of the hold number information 702 is erased in preference to the hold mark of the first hold number information 701.

  Although not particularly illustrated, different display images, background images, and the like are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in various effect modes according to the effect contents. Of course, the same display image, background image, etc. may be displayed in different rendering modes.

[Screen display example of song pattern A]
97 and 98 are diagrams showing examples of the screen display of the music pattern A. FIG. In the above-described initial section, first to fifth sections, first branch section, and second branch section, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is interlocked with the music output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. An effect image is also displayed. 97 and 98, the effect image corresponding to the initial section is omitted. For example, it is assumed that an effect image such as a title display in which the song title is displayed according to the intro part is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the first section of the music pattern A, the predetermined character sings the A melody part in conjunction with the output of the A melody part that is the first common part of the predetermined music. An effect image is displayed, and in the first branch section of the music pattern A, an effect image indicating whether or not output of a predetermined music continues is displayed.

  When the winning pattern is the winning pattern 8, an effect image that suggests that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed in the fourth section of the music pattern A, and the winning pattern is the winning pattern 3. In such a case, an effect image suggesting that the specific second round game is executed is displayed in conjunction with the output of the predetermined sound that is a specific part of the predetermined music.

  When the hit pattern is the hit pattern 1 or 7, as shown in FIG. 98, the predetermined character is displayed in conjunction with the output of the B melody portion which is the second common portion of the predetermined music. An effect image for singing the B melody portion is displayed, and in the second branch section of the music pattern A, an effect image indicating whether or not the output of the predetermined music continues is displayed.

  When the winning pattern is the winning pattern 7, an effect image that suggests that the specific second round game is not executed is displayed in the fourth section of the music pattern A, and the winning pattern is the winning pattern 1. In such a case, an effect image that suggests that the specific second round game is executed is displayed in conjunction with the output of the chorus portion that is the specific portion of the predetermined music.

[Example of screen display of story section in ST mode]
99 and 100 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the story sections in the ST mode. As shown in FIG. 99, first hold number information 701 and second hold number information 702 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the ST mode story section, and the story corresponding to the current number of sets. The set story display area 703 (first image display means) for displaying an image (first image) and a scheduled set for displaying a window image (second image) suggesting a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward. A window display area 704 (second image display means) is provided. The decorative design 700 may be displayed in a variable manner by being superimposed on the set story display area 703 with a predetermined transparency, and reduced to the set story display area 703, the scheduled set window display area 704, or other areas. Then, it may be displayed in a variable manner. Alternatively, the decorative symbol 700 may not be displayed in the story section in the ST mode.

  As described above, in the story section of the ST mode, a series of story effects are performed according to the value of the current number of sets and the value of the ST middle villa counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, when the value of the ST renso counter is “1”, the story effect of “first episode” which is the first story effect in the series of story effects is the current one. When the value of the ST-resort villa counter is “2”, it is performed according to the value of the number of sets, and “Story 2” is a story effect that follows “Story 1” in a series of story effects. Will be performed according to the current number of sets. At this time, story images 703a and 703b corresponding to the current number of sets are displayed in the set story display area 703, and window images 704a and 704b suggesting stories corresponding to the number of sets from the next time are displayed on the scheduled set window display area 704. Will be displayed.

  For example, when the number of sets is updated to the next set number (added by 1), a story image corresponding to the story suggested by the window image 704a (704b) is displayed in the set story display area 703. In addition to being displayed, a plurality of window images displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 slide to the left, and the update of the number of sets (that is, the progress of the story production) is notified. In FIG. 100, a white window image, a hatched window image, and a black window image displayed in the schedule set window display area 704 are schematically shown as different window images (that is, different stories). It is a representation.

[Example of screen display of effect pattern per related story for SP bonus]
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a screen display example of an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus. In this embodiment, in the ST mode story section, a series of story effects are performed according to the value of the current number of sets and the value of the ST Churenso counter. In this case, the effect pattern per SP bonus related story related to the series of story effects is determined (see FIG. 91).

  The upper part of FIG. 101 shows a screen display example of an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus when the value of the ST middle villa counter is “1” and the value of the management counter during ST is less than “26”. ing. In this screen display example, the value of the ST renzo counter is “1” as an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus related to the story effect pattern during ST when the value of the ST renso counter is “1”. The outline of the story of a series of story productions by the story production pattern during ST is displayed. That is, in this screen display example, a summary of stories in a series of story effects is displayed as a related story effect.

  The lower part of FIG. 101 shows a screen display example of an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus when the value of the ST middle villa counter is “1” and the value of the management counter during ST is “26” or more. ing. In this screen display example, the value of the ST renzo counter is “1” as an effect pattern per related story for SP bonus related to the story effect pattern during ST when the value of the ST renso counter is “1”. In this case, a name scene of a series of story productions by a story production pattern during ST and a description (corresponding story) of the name scene are displayed. When displaying the name scene, the window image (second image) displayed in the above-described scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) is used. That is, in this screen display example, a window image (second image) and a story corresponding to the window image (second image) are displayed as related story effects. As the related story effect, only the window image (second image) may be displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the ST mode story section to the SP bonus for the second special symbol, a series of ST effect production patterns in the SP special bonus for the second special symbol. The related story production is performed by the production pattern per related story for SP bonus related to the story production. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately advance the story effect without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

  In the present embodiment, the related story effect by the SP bonus related story effect pattern depends on the progress of the story in the series of story effects by the ST story effect pattern (for example, the value of the management counter during ST). It is configured to be displayed. With this configuration, a series of story effects performed in a predetermined section (for example, a ST section of the ST mode) in a special gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, an SP bonus when a big hit is made in the special gaming state) ) Can be related to the related story production performed in (3), and an appropriate related story production can be performed in consideration of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as the degree of progress of a story in a series of story effects, the case where the value of the management counter during ST is less than “26” is regarded as a case where the degree of progress of the story is small, and the summaries of stories in the series of story effects are summarized. And the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image), when the ST management counter value is “26” or more, and the story has a high degree of progress. However, the display is not limited to this.

  For example, according to the value of the management counter during ST (or the value of the set number counter), the display contents of the summary of the story in the related story production may be made different. In this case, for a series of story effects, a summary may be displayed for other parts other than the part already performed in the ST section of the ST mode, and a summary of the part already performed in the ST section of the ST mode may be displayed. It is good also as displaying the story which was supposed to be performed by a series of story production about other parts as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, a summary of a story according to the progress of the story in a series of story effects can be displayed. According to this embodiment, when a series of story effects progress according to the number of consecutive hits in a special gaming state (for example, the ST mode) (for example, the value of the ST during the extended range counter), the next series The related story effect in a specific gaming state (for example, SP bonus) can be performed with the effect content of the story effect and the effect content that does not cause a habit.

  Further, for example, according to the value of the management counter during ST (or the value of the set number counter), the display contents of the story corresponding to the window image (second image) and the window image (second image) are further displayed. It may be different. In this case, for a series of story effects, a story corresponding to a window image (second image) and a window image (second image) corresponding to other portions other than the portion already performed in the story section of the ST mode is selected. It is also possible to display, for a portion already performed in the ST mode story section, a window image (second image) and a story corresponding to the window image (second image) corresponding to the portion are displayed, For other parts, the story that should have been performed by a series of story effects may be displayed as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to display a window image (second image) and a story corresponding to the window image (second image) according to the progress of the story in a series of story effects. According to this embodiment, when a series of story effects progress according to the number of consecutive hits in a special gaming state (for example, the ST mode) (for example, the value of the ST during the extended range counter), the next series The related story effect in a specific gaming state (for example, SP bonus) can be performed with the effect content of the story effect and the effect content that does not cause a habit, and a window image (second image) used in a series of story effects. Since it is also used in the related story production, the image data for production can be reduced and more storage areas can be secured.

[Example of screen display of story production pattern during ST]
102 to 110 are diagrams showing screen display examples of a story effect pattern during ST. 102 to 110 show the contents of effects within the basic effect time (10 s) corresponding to one set (5 special symbol games) in the ST mode story section. The display area 4A, the set story display area 703 (first image display means), and the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) are the same as or similar to those shown in FIG. Therefore, the reference numerals are omitted in FIGS. In addition, the description of the first reserved number information 701 and the second reserved number information 702 is omitted in FIGS. 102 to 110 for convenience of explanation.

  In FIG. 102, in any of the first to fifth variation games, the big hit determination result (lottery result) is lost, and the first variation time corresponding to the first variation time (for example, 2s) is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the during-ST story effect pattern in predetermined 1 set when the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern which shows shortening variation) is determined. The remaining effect time is calculated based on the basic effect time (10 s) described above and the value of the management counter during ST (or the value of the in-set counter) (see FIG. 84), and within the set (1 / 5-5 / 5) indicates the number of games in one set. The same applies to FIGS. 103 to 110. In FIG. 102, since the remaining effect time and the fluctuation time are synchronized, a series of story effects in a predetermined set progress based on the basic effect time.

  In FIG. 103, in the game of the first variation and the second variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the first variation pattern corresponding to the first variation time is the variation pattern. In the third variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a win, and the second variation time (for example, 6 s) longer than the first variation time (for example, 2 s) described above as the variation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a screen display example of a story effect pattern during ST in a predetermined set when a second variation pattern corresponding to (for example, a variation pattern indicating normal reach) is determined. In FIG. 103, since the remaining production time and the fluctuation time are synchronized, a series of story productions progress in a predetermined set based on the basic production time, and based on the jackpot notification production data at the end of the predetermined set. A big hit announcement will be made.

  In FIG. 104, in the first variation game, the big hit determination result (lottery result) is a loss, and the first variation pattern corresponding to the first variation time is determined as the variation pattern. In the variation, the big hit determination result (lottery result) is a win, and the variation pattern corresponds to the second variation time (for example, 6 s) longer than the first variation time (for example, 2 s) described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story effect pattern during ST in predetermined 1 set when the 2 fluctuation patterns (For example, the fluctuation pattern which shows normal reach A) are determined. In FIG. 104, since the remaining performance time is longer than the variation time, among the in-set effects in a predetermined one set (the portion corresponding to the predetermined one set in a series of story effects), the second (2 For the portion corresponding to / 5) to the fifth time (5/5), the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining effect time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining part of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining part of the in-set effect that is normally performed over 8s as the remaining effect time ends in 6s. In addition, the aspect which advances the remaining part of the production in a set can take various aspects. For example, when image data (video data) related to the remaining portion of the in-set effect is reproduced for 8 s, control for changing the reproduction speed (that is, fast-forward reproduction) so that the reproduction time is 6 s. It is also possible to perform control to change the frame rate (that is, to perform thinning reproduction). Also, these changed image data (video data) may be stored in advance. The same applies to FIGS. 106 and 110.

  105 and 106, in the game of the first variation to the third variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a loss, and the first pattern corresponding to the first variation time described above as a variation pattern. The variation pattern is determined, and in the fourth variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a win, and the variation pattern is a second variation time (for example, 2 s) longer than the first variation time (for example, 2 s). 10s) during the ST in the predetermined one set and the next one (next set) following the predetermined one when the second fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern indicating normal reach B) is determined. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of a story production pattern. In FIGS. 105 and 106, since the variation time is longer than the remaining effect time, the in-set effect in a predetermined set is performed according to the basic effect time, and a series of story effects proceeds. Here, the effectable time is calculated based on the second change time (for example, 10 s) and the remaining effect time (for example, 4 s, which is the remaining effect time of the fourth change) (see FIG. 84). In the screen display examples shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the available time is 6 s. Moreover, since the possible production time is 6 s, the production end target set is the next set. And, for the in-set effects in the next set, out of the in-set effects in the next set (the part corresponding to the next set in the series of story effects), the first (1/5) to the fifth (5/5) in the set For the portion corresponding to), the in-set effect is advanced so that the effectable time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining portion of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining portion of the in-set effect that is normally performed for 10 s as the remaining effect time ends in 6 s.

  In FIGS. 107 to 110, in the game of the first variation to the third variation, the big hit determination result (lottery result) is a loss, and the first pattern corresponding to the first variation time described above as a variation pattern. The variation pattern is determined, and in the fourth variation, the result of the big hit determination (lottery result) is a win, and the variation pattern is a second variation time (for example, 2 s) longer than the first variation time (for example, 2 s). , 30 s) is determined, for example, a variation pattern indicating a super reach), a predetermined one set, a next one set following the predetermined one set, and a next one set. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the story production pattern during ST in 1 set after 2 sets, and 1 set after 3 sets (after the next set-3 sets after) after 1 set after 2 sets. . In FIGS. 107 to 110, since the variation time is longer than the remaining effect time, the in-set effect in a predetermined set is performed according to the basic effect time, and a series of story effects proceeds. In addition, in the screen display examples shown in FIGS. 107 to 110, the possible production time is 26 s, so the production end target set is after 3 sets, and the basic production time is also set for the production within the set after the next set and after 2 sets. A series of story productions will proceed. For the effects in the set after the third set, among the effects in the set after the third set (the part corresponding to after the third set in the series of story effects), the first (1/5) to the fifth (5 in the set) For the portion corresponding to / 5), the in-set effect is advanced so that the effectable time and the fluctuation time are synchronized. That is, the remaining portion of the in-set effect is advanced so that the remaining portion of the in-set effect that is normally performed for 10 s as the remaining effect time ends in 6 s.

  In addition, in FIGS. 107 to 110, the production ends from the portion corresponding to the fifth (5/5) in the set from the portion in the set in the predetermined set to the next set and the production in the set after the second set. The window image that suggests the effect in the set after the third set as the target set is displayed in the scheduled set window display area 704 (second image display means) in a special effect mode based on the special effect data during ST. It has become. Specifically, the window image suggesting the in-set effect after the third set, which is the effect end target set, is displayed by highlighting, which is a display mode different from normal. Note that the display mode different from the normal display mode is not limited to this, and the outer frame of the window image may be set to a display mode different from the normal mode, and a semi-transparent image ( For example, the letter V) may be displayed. Further, the special effect mode based on the special effect data during ST is not limited to displaying the window image in a display mode different from the normal display mode, and the story image to be displayed in the set story display area 703 (first image display means) is displayed. You may display with the display mode different from usual.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a series of story effects is advanced with a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 times) as one set in a predetermined section (for example, a ST section in the ST mode) in the special game state. The time obtained by multiplying the first variation time (for example, 2 s) by a predetermined number of games (5 times corresponding to one set) is set as the basic performance time (for example, 10 s), and the number of sets based on this basic performance time. Advance the story corresponding to. When the variation pattern determined when the big hit is the second variation pattern corresponding to the second variation time (for example, 30 s) longer than the first variation time, it is within one set. The remaining performance time is calculated based on the number of games in the game and the basic performance time, and if the second variation time is longer than the remaining performance time, the production end target set after the next set is set as a special By suggesting an effect mode (for example, an effect mode in which a window image suggesting an in-set effect of the effect end target set is displayed in a display mode different from normal), a specific game state (for example, SP in the effect end target set) is suggested. (Bonus) is notified.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to substantially synchronize the production time of a series of story effects executed over a plurality of games and the variation time of the identification symbol, with one set as one unit, with a simple configuration. In addition, even if it is decided to be a big hit, a series of story productions will be advanced as little as possible and a bonus announcement will be made that will improve the interest of the player (specific games) State advance notice).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, about the part corresponding to the number of sets (for example, the production in the set of the production end target set) corresponding to the number of sets suggested by the special production mode in the series of story productions, It is configured to advance the story in sync with the end. By configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the production time of multiple sets in the series of story productions and the variation time of the identification symbol, and it is possible to perform a series of story productions and jackpot notices in a more comfortable manner It becomes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the window image (second image) corresponding to the number of sets suggested by a special effect mode in a series of story effects is displayed in a display mode different from normal. It is configured. By configuring in this way, using a window image (second image) that suggests a story corresponding to the number of sets from the next time onward, a jackpot notice (transition to a specific gaming state) that will further enhance interest Notice).

[Display example of item pre-reading effect]
111 to 113 are diagrams showing screen display examples of item prefetching effects. 111 shows an image display example in the case where an effect image indicating that the plate A has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4A before the change, and the upper right of FIG. 111 shows an image display before the change. In FIG. 111, an image display example in the case where an effect image indicating that the plate B has been acquired is displayed in the display area 4A is shown. In the lower left of FIG. 111, the plate C has been acquired before the change. An effect display image is shown in the display area 4A, and in the lower right of FIG. 111, an effect image indicating that the plate D has been acquired before the change is displayed in the display area 4A. An image display example when displayed is shown.

  In the effect image indicating that the plate A is acquired, the expectation type associated with the plate A together with the image of the plate A is a pseudo-continuous effect, indicating that the plate B is acquired. In the effect image, the expectation type associated with the plate B together with the image of the plate B is indicated to be a serif effect, and in the effect image indicating that the plate C is acquired, the plate C is displayed together with the image of the plate C. In the effect image indicating that the type of expectation associated with is a cut-in effect and that the plate D is acquired, the expectation is obtained by acquiring the plate D together with the image of the plate D. It is shown to be high. Thus, before the said change, according to the processing result of the item acquisition effect processing (see FIG. 90), the degree of expectation that the type of the acquired plate (item) is associated with the plate (item) It will be notified with the type.

  FIG. 112 shows a case where the pseudo-continuous number is “1” in the item pre-reading effect (more specifically, the item use effect process shown in FIGS. 86 to 89) (that is, the pseudo-ream is executed once). It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display. 112 (a) shows the start of fluctuation of the decorative design 700, (b) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the normal temporary stop, and (c) shows the use of the plate A. (D) shows the effect display corresponding to the effect data of the pseudo continuous temporary stop, and (e) shows the decorative pattern 700 from the pseudo continuous stop. Indicates the start of re-variation in which the variation starts again, and (f) indicates that the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the reach state.

  In the variation of the item prefetching effect shown in FIG. 112, first, as shown in (a), the variation display of the decorative design 700 is started in a normal variation mode. Here, for example, when the plate A is acquired and it is not notified that the plate A is acquired before the change, the effect image similar to the effect image shown in the upper left of FIG. It is notified that the plate A has been acquired (see S491 in FIG. 86). Next, when one plate A is acquired, as shown in (b), only one plate A is more than the predetermined expectation degree (pseudo-continuous one time) as the expectation degree of the pseudo-continuous production. After an effect display of normal temporary stop with low expectation (indicating zero pseudo-continuations) is performed, an effect display using plate A is performed as shown in (c), and based on this plate A, ( As shown in d) and (e), the effect display of pseudo-continuous temporary stop and re-variation start is performed according to a predetermined expectation (pseudo-continuous once). Then, as shown in (f), it is informed whether or not it will reach a reach state and finally a big hit. On the other hand, if the plate A is not acquired, as shown in (d) and (e), the effect of the pseudo continuous temporary stop and the start of re-variation according to a predetermined expectation (pseudo continuous 1 time). Display is performed. Then, as shown in (f), it is informed whether or not it will reach a reach state and finally a big hit.

  FIG. 113 shows a case where the pseudo-continuous number is “3” in the item pre-reading effect (more specifically, the item use effect process shown in FIGS. 86 to 89) (that is, the pseudo-ream is executed three times). And it is a figure which shows the example of a screen display when two plates A are acquired. Note that (a) to (f) in FIG. 113 are the same as those shown in FIG. 112, and therefore the display content of the screen is omitted in FIG.

  Also in the variation of the item prefetching effect shown in FIG. 113, first, as shown in (a), the variation display of the decorative design 700 is started in a normal variation mode. Here, since the pseudo-continuous number is “3” and the number of plates A is two, the plate A is used in the first pseudo-continuous so that the plate A is used in the latter half of the pseudo-continuous effect in the variation. A is not used. Therefore, the effect display of (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop and (e) re-variation start is performed, and the first pseudo continuous is completed. Next, since the number of pseudo stations is “2” and the number of plates A is 2, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) use of plate A, (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop, and (e) re-variation A start effect display is performed, and the second pseudo-ream ends. Next, since the number of pseudo stations is “1” and the number of plates A is two, (b) normal temporary stop, (c) use of plate A, (d) pseudo continuous temporary stop, and (e) re-variation The start effect display is performed, the third pseudo-ream ends, (f) the reach effect display is performed, and it is informed whether or not it will ultimately be a big hit.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) defined in the item prefetching effect is 0, a predetermined expectation type (for example, pseudo-continuous) corresponding to the predetermined item. A predetermined effect (for example, (d) pseudo-continuous stop and (e) re-variation start effect display) in which a predetermined expectation degree is notified as an expectation degree (for example, pseudo-continuous number). When the number of predetermined items (for example, plate A) defined in the item pre-reading effect is 1 or more, the expected degree of a predetermined expectation type (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) corresponding to the predetermined item After an expected degree lower than the predetermined degree of expectation (for example, pseudo-continuous number) is notified by a predetermined number of items (for example, (b) a normal temporary stop effect is displayed), Based on item (E.g., (c) based on the effect display using plate A being performed) a predetermined expectation is reported (e.g., (d) pseudo-temporary stop and (e) re-variation start Effect display is performed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a jackpot notice (change notice to a specific gaming state) that is more varied.

[Modification of this embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. In the following modifications, unless otherwise indicated, each process in the present embodiment is performed in the same manner.

<Winning effect pattern determination table (modified example)>
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a hit effect pattern determination table of the present modification. In the winning effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56, for each type of winning pattern, the type of winning effect pattern determined is determined according to the lottery value. In the table (modified example), the type of the winning effect pattern to be determined is further defined according to the winning rate. The determination of the winning rate may be performed by the main CPU 61 or may be performed by the sub CPU 71.

  The winning rate is, for example, a game won in the first start port 32, the second start port 33, the first major winning port 36, the second major winning port 37, or the general winning ports 40A, 40B, 40C, 40D in a predetermined period. It can be determined from the number of game balls won in the number of balls, or a combination of these balls. In addition, the predetermined period is, for example, a certain period in the non-probability / non-time-saving gaming state, a certain period in the non-probability / time-short gaming state, a certain period in the probability-changing / time-short gaming state, or a certain period in the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) , Or a combination of these can be set for a predetermined period. In this modified example, as an example of the winning rate, the number of game balls won in the first big winning opening 36 / required for a specific first round game (for example, 1R) in the big hit game state (specific game state) The winning rate is calculated from time. For example, if the number of game balls won in the first grand prize opening 36 is nine and the time required for a specific first round game in the big hit game state (specific game state) is 18 s, the prize per 1 s is won. The rate is 50%. Here, the threshold of the winning rate can be set as appropriate, but in this modification, the threshold of this winning rate of 50% is taken as an example of the threshold. In the winning effect pattern determination table (modified example) shown in FIG. 114, the description of the winning effect pattern corresponding to the story bonus and the winning effect pattern corresponding to the battle bonus is omitted for convenience of explanation. .

  As shown in FIG. 114, in the winning effect pattern determination table (modified example), as the type of the winning pattern, as in the winning effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Success), music pattern A (reversal) constituting the live bonus 5R success, music pattern A (failure) constituting the live bonus 8R failure and the live bonus 4R failure are defined. Also, for the music pattern A (success), the music pattern A (success) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern A (success) short selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold. Is stipulated. Also, for the music pattern A (reverse), the music pattern A (reverse) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold, and the music pattern A (reverse) short selected when the winning rate is greater than or equal to the threshold. Is stipulated. Also, for the music pattern A (failure), the music pattern A (failure) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold, and the music pattern A (failure) short selected when the winning rate is greater than or equal to the threshold. Is stipulated. Here, “long” indicates a hit effect pattern in which the effect time (for example, the time during which the music pattern A is output) is set to a relatively long time, and “short” means the effect time. Indicates a hit production pattern set in a relatively short time. In other words, in the present modification, the music pattern A (success) long and the music pattern A (success) short constitute both the live bonus 9R success, but the time corresponding to the music pattern A is output in the live bonus. The hit production pattern is configured to be different.

  Similarly, for the music pattern B (success), the music pattern B (success) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern B (success) selected when the winning rate is equal to or higher than the threshold. Short is defined, and for the music pattern B (reverse), the music pattern B (reverse) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold, and the music pattern B (selected when the winning rate is greater than or equal to the threshold) Reversal) Short is specified, and for music pattern B (failure), music pattern B (failure) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold, and music pattern selected when the winning rate is greater than or equal to the threshold B (failure) short is specified. Similarly, for the music pattern C (confirmed), the music pattern C (confirmed) long selected when the winning rate is less than the threshold and the music pattern C (selected) when the winning rate is greater than or equal to the threshold. (Final) Short is specified.

  Here, the winning rate can be an index as to whether or not the player is actively firing the game ball using the launching device 26 (that is, whether the player is aggressive in the game). Therefore, when the player is active in the game, for example, the music pattern A (success) short is configured as the winning effect pattern, and when the player is not active in the game, for example, By configuring so that the music pattern A (successful) long is selected as the winning effect pattern, the effect of the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) that matches the game tendency (game progress speed) of the player is performed. In addition, the end of the output of the music by the music pattern and the end of the big hit game state (specific game state) can be more easily synchronized.

  In addition, various methods can be used as a method of making the output time different in the same winning effect pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)). For example, the music pattern A (success) long constitutes each section as shown in the upper part of FIG. 94, and the music pattern A (success) short represents an effect corresponding to one or a plurality of sections in each section. The time may be shortened, or a section that is not output may be determined. Moreover, as a method of shortening the production time, the tempo of the music corresponding to the music pattern may be increased, or the arranged music may be output.

  Various timings can be used as the timing for determining the winning rate. For example, in the above-described example, the winning rate in the big hit gaming state (specific game state) that has just shifted to the big hit gaming state (specific game state) where the live bonus is to be performed this time may be determined. In this case, it is updated every time the winning rate to be determined becomes a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). Also, the winning rate when the game machine is turned on or when a predetermined error (for example, a door opening error indicating that the front frame 3 or the protective glass 7 has been opened, a backup error of the work RAM 73, etc.) is restored. An average value may be calculated. In this case, the winning rate to be determined is cleared when the gaming machine is disconnected or when a predetermined error occurs.

  Further, in the above example, when calculating the winning rate, the number of game balls won in the first grand prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37 / game balls launched in the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) It is good also as calculating | requiring a winning rate from the number of. Also in this case, it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the player is active in the game.

<Story production table group>
FIG. 115 is a conceptual diagram showing a story effect table group of this modification. In the present embodiment, a series of story effects are performed in the ST mode story section, and when the ST mode story section is shifted to the SP bonus, related story effects related to the series of story effects are displayed in the SP bonus. However, in this modification, in all the production modes (game state), the production related to a specific story is performed, and the story is advanced in units of a specific story.

  For example, when the specific story is the first story, in the normal mode, the effect pattern is determined with reference to the effect pattern determination table in the first story corresponding normal mode corresponding to the first story. Thereby, in the normal mode, it is possible to determine an effect pattern or the like corresponding to an effect that introduces a character appearing in the first story. Further, in the short mode of the time reduction mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the effect pattern determination table in the first story corresponding short mode corresponding to the first story. In the short mode long mode, the effect pattern is determined by referring to the effect pattern determination table in the first story corresponding long mode corresponding to the first story. Thereby, in the time reduction mode, it is possible to determine an effect pattern or the like corresponding to an effect in which a background image related to the first story is displayed. Further, during the first special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined with reference to the first story corresponding hit effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. Thereby, in the live bonus, the music pattern related to the first story can be selected, in the story bonus, the story pattern related to the first story can be selected, and in the battle bonus, the battle related to the first story can be selected. The pattern can be selected. Further, during the second special symbol hit, the hit effect pattern is determined with reference to the first story corresponding SP bonus hit effect pattern determination table corresponding to the first story. Thereby, in SP bonus, it relates to the 1st story depending on whether the production mode before the transition is the short-time mode, the ST mode story section, or the ST mode battle reach section. A hit production pattern can be selected. In the ST mode, the first pattern corresponding to the first story is referred to the effect pattern determination table during the ST mode and related to the first story depending on whether it is a story section or a battle reach section. An effect pattern to be selected can be selected. The same applies to the case where the specific story is the second story or the third story.

  It should be noted that an effect related to the second story is performed from the first effect control state in which the effect related to the first story is performed (that is, each effect pattern is selected from the first story effect table group). Effect related to the third story is performed from the transition condition to the second effect control state, which is a state in which each effect pattern is selected from the second story effect table group, and the second effect control state. Various conditions can be adopted for the transition condition to the third effect control state which is a state (that is, a state in which each effect pattern is selected from the third story effect table group). As an example, if, for example, a big win is obtained in the normal mode of the first production control state and a V prize is awarded during the first special symbol of the first production control state, the first production is also performed in the ST mode in which the transition is made thereafter. The control state is continued, and the transition to the second effect control state is performed using the end of the ST mode as a transition condition. In addition, when a non-V prize is won during the first special control in the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued even in the time-saving mode to be shifted thereafter, and the end of the time-saving mode is set as a transition condition. Then, the state is shifted to the second effect control state. Or it is good also as making it transfer to the 2nd effect control state by making into a transition condition that it became a non-V prize-winning during the 1st special symbol of the 1st effect control state. That is, at the end of a specific gaming state (for example, during the first special symbol), a special gaming state (for example, ST mode), or a short-time gaming state (for example, short-time mode), which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, The production control state (first to third production control states) can be shifted. By configuring in this way, even if a state advantageous to the player is finished, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation by proceeding with a specific story.

  Further, as another example, a transition to the second effect control state is made under the condition that a big win is made in the normal mode of the first effect control state and a V winning is made during the first special symbol of the first effect control state. When the non-V winning is made during the first special symbol in the first effect control state, the first effect control state is continued even in the time-saving mode to be shifted thereafter. Or it is good also as making it transfer to the 2nd production control state on the condition that it was a big hit in the normal mode of the 1st production control state. That is, at the time of transition to a specific game state (for example, during the first special symbol) that is a game state advantageous for the player or a special game state (for example, ST mode), each effect control state (first to third effects) The control state can be shifted. By configuring in this way, a specific story progresses when shifting to a state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In addition, various conditions can be taken also about the initialization conditions which transfer an effect control state to an initial control state (for example, 1st effect control state). For example, an initialization condition may be that the gaming machine has been cut off, or the occurrence of the predetermined error described above, and the demo display is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 30 minutes or longer). It is good also as initialization conditions that it continued.

<Main variation time determination table (modified example)>
FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a main variation time determination table of the present modification. In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 performs the ST mode processing (see FIG. 83) and the ST story effect pattern change processing (see FIG. 84), so that the main CPU 61 determines in the ST mode story section. The variation pattern (end timing of the variation time of the identification symbol) is synchronized with the end of the in-set effect in the series of story effects. However, in this modified example, the main CPU 61 further terminates the in-set effect. It is configured to determine a variation pattern (end timing of variation time of identification symbol) to be synchronized. In the present embodiment, detailed description of the main variation time determination table is omitted, but a main variation time determination table similar to that shown in FIG. 116 may be adopted, and some or all of them are different. A main variation time determination table may be used.

  In the main variation time determination table (modified example) shown in FIG. 116, the big hit determination result (winning), the current gaming state (non-probability / non-time short, non-probability / time short, probability change / time short), and reach determination random The type of variation pattern to be determined is defined according to various parameters such as a range (0 to 250) and an effect selection random number range (0 to 99), and the game state is a probabilistic / short-time game state ( In the case of ST gaming state), the number of games is “1-50 times” (whether it is a story section in ST mode) or “51-180 times” (battle reach section in ST mode) Depending on whether the type of variation pattern is different. Further, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, different types of variation patterns are defined according to the value of the in-set counter. In the present embodiment, the case where the in-set counter is provided in the work RAM 73 and counted by the sub CPU 71 has been described. However, in this modification, the in-set counter is also provided in the main RAM 63, It is assumed that the number of games in the set is counted by the main CPU 61. In addition, the count of the number of games in the probability variation / short time gaming state (ST gaming state) may be obtained from the value of the probability variation number counter, and an ST management counter is also provided in the main RAM 63, and the main CPU 61 The number of games may be counted.

  The reach determination random number range determines the reach variation time for determining the reach variation time, or defines the range of the reach determination random number for which the reach variation time is not determined. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when a game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each gaming state. The effect selection random number range defines the reach determination random number range, the variation time, and the effect selection random number range corresponding to the effect contents. The random number value for effect selection is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each game state.

  In the winning effect pattern determination table (modified example) shown in FIG. 116, for example, when the result of the big hit determination is lost in the ST section, the variation pattern is “02H” with a selection rate of 96/100. Is selected, and “03H” is selected as the variation pattern at a selectivity of 4/100. The variation pattern “02H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the production content is the shortened variation A. Further, the variation pattern “03H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the effect content is the shortened variation B. Here, the variation pattern “02H” corresponds to the above-described first variation pattern corresponding to a specific variation time (for example, 2 s), and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. . However, in the story section in the ST mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the variation pattern “02H” may be always selected.

  Also, for example, in the ST mode story section, if the result of the big hit determination is a win, and the value of the in-set counter is “1” (that is, the first game in one set), With a selection rate of 96/100, “07H” is selected as a variation pattern, “04H” is selected as a variation pattern with a selection rate of 2/100, and “05H” is selected as a variation pattern with a selection rate of 2/100. Is done. The variation pattern “07H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 10000 ms (10 s) and the content of the effect is the special variation A. The variation pattern “04H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 20000 ms (20 s) and the effect content is Super Reach A. Further, the variation pattern “05H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 30000 ms (30 s) and the production content is Super Reach B. Here, the variation pattern “07H” corresponds to the above-described second variation pattern different from the above-described first variation pattern, and is determined with high probability in the story section in the ST mode. Of course, in the story section of the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, if the value of the in-set counter is “1”, the variation pattern “07H” may be always selected.

  Also, for example, in the ST mode story section, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, and the value of the in-set counter is “2” (that is, the second game in one set), With a selection rate of 96/100, “08H” is selected as a variation pattern, “04H” is selected as a variation pattern with a selection rate of 2/100, and “05H” is selected as a variation pattern with a selection rate of 2/100. Is done. The variation pattern “08H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 8000 ms (8 s) and the production content is the special variation B. Here, as described above, the variation pattern “08H” corresponds to the second variation pattern described above, which is different from the first variation pattern described above, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. Of course, in the story section in the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, if the value of the in-set counter is “2”, the variation pattern “08H” may be always selected.

  Also, for example, in the ST mode story section, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, and the value of the in-set counter is “3” (that is, the third game in one set), With a selection rate of 96/100, “09H” is selected as a variation pattern, “04H” is selected as a variation pattern at a selection rate of 2/100, and “05H” is selected as a variation pattern at a selection rate of 2/100. Is done. The variation pattern “09H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 6000 ms (6 s) and the production content is the special variation C. Here, as described above, the variation pattern “09H” corresponds to the second variation pattern described above, which is different from the first variation pattern described above, and is determined with high probability in the story section of the ST mode. ing. Of course, in the story section in the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, if the value of the in-set counter is “3”, the variation pattern “09H” may be always selected.

  Also, for example, in the ST mode story section, if the result of the big hit determination is a win, and the value of the in-set counter is “4” (that is, the fourth game in one set), “0AH” is selected as a variation pattern at a selection rate of 96/100, “04H” is selected as a variation pattern at a selection rate of 2/100, and “05H” is selected as a variation pattern at a selectivity of 2/100 Is done. The variation pattern “0AH” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 4000 ms (4 s) and the content of the effect is the special variation D. Here, as described above, the variation pattern “0AH” corresponds to the second variation pattern described above, which is different from the first variation pattern described above, and is determined with high probability in the story section in the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section in the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a win and the value of the in-set counter is “4”, the variation pattern “0AH” may be always selected.

  Also, for example, in the ST mode story section, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, and the value of the in-set counter is “5” (that is, the fifth game in one set), “0BH” is selected as the variation pattern at a selection rate of 96/100, “04H” is selected as the variation pattern at a selection rate of 2/100, and “05H” is selected as the variation pattern at a selection rate of 2/100. Is done. The variation pattern “0BH” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 2000 ms (2 s) and the production content is the special variation E. Here, as described above, the variation pattern “0BH” corresponds to the second variation pattern described above, which is different from the first variation pattern described above, and is determined with high probability in the story section in the ST mode. ing. However, in the story section in the ST mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a win, if the value of the in-set counter is “5”, the variation pattern “0BH” may be always selected.

  As described above, in the present modification, the second variation pattern is determined based on the value of the in-set counter. However, as described above, the value of the in-set counter is “1”. In some cases, the remaining presentation time in the one set is 10 s, and when the in-set counter value is “2”, the remaining presentation time in the one set is 8 s. When the value of the counter is “3”, the aforementioned remaining presentation time in the one set is 6 s, and when the value of the counter in the set is “4”, the aforementioned remaining presentation in the one set. When the time is 4 s and the value of the in-set counter is “5”, the remaining presentation time in the one set is 2 s. That is, in the present modification, the variation time is synchronized with the end of the predetermined performance (the production within the set) by determining the variation pattern using the hit production pattern determination table (modified example) shown in FIG. The second variation pattern corresponding to is determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the production time of a predetermined production (for example, production in a set) and the variation time of the identification symbol in which a series of productions are executed over a plurality of games. Become.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following gaming machine can be provided.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming area provided in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass). 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a first variable winning device (for example, provided in the game area, which can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received) The first big prize opening 36) and a first area that is provided in the gaming area and can be changed between a first mode that easily accepts game media and a second mode that hardly accepts game media. , A second variable winning device (for example, the second big prize opening 37) having a specific area 38A) and a specific gaming state (for example, advantageous to the player) on the condition that the game medium has passed through the starting area , The jackpot gaming state) A gaming state on condition that a specific gaming state transition judging means (for example, the main CPU 61) for judging whether or not to make a judgment result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means. Specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and after the specific game state is ended on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, Special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling to a special gaming state (for example, probability variation / short time gaming state) in which the determination result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state is relatively easily obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means ) And the first round game for changing the first variable prize-winning device to the first mode and the second mode in the specific gaming state a predetermined number of times. First round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61) that can be executed, and in the specific game state, a second round game that changes the second variable prize-winning device to the first mode and the second mode can be executed a predetermined number of times. A music pattern selection means (for example, a music pattern selection means (for example, main CPU 61) and a music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when controlled by the specific game state control means to the specific game state) , A sub CPU 71), and a music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs music according to the music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special game state, During the execution of the second round game, the second round game execution means is relatively free of passing of the game medium to the specific area. It is possible to perform a specific second round game that is easy, and the specific game state is the first round game of the first specific number of times (for example, four times 1 to 4R) by the first round game execution means. Is executed, the first specific gaming state (for example, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the hit pattern 3) in which at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game executing means; After the first specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means, the second specific game state (for example, a hit pattern) in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means. And the music pattern selection means is controlled to the first specific game state by the specific game state control means. In addition, when a first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse)) can be selected and controlled to the second specific game state by the specific game state control means, a second music pattern (for example, , Music pattern A (failure)) can be selected, and for the first music pattern, a first common part of a predetermined music (for example, A melody in the first section) is output by the music output means. It is a predetermined music pattern that a specific part (for example, reverse of the fifth section) of the predetermined music is output after the elapse of a branch period (for example, the first branch section), and the second The music pattern is determined in advance that the first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branch period has elapsed. The music output means has a predetermined time (for example, an initial section) when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The predetermined music is output from the waiting time before the start of the 1Rth when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a time when output of the specific part of the predetermined music can be started before execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll and a starting area (for example, gaming media that can be passed through the gaming area). The first start port 32, the second start port 33), and the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, which are provided in the game area, can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received. It is advantageous to the player on condition that the variable winning device (for example, the big winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117) having a possible specific area (for example, the specific area 38A) and the game medium pass through the starting area. Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, big hit game state), and the specific game state transition determination means for transition to the specific game state. On the condition that the determination result is obtained, the specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state After the specific game state is over, the special game state (for example, probability change / short-time game state) is relatively easy to obtain a determination result to the effect that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state. Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) to be controlled) and in the specific game state, the first variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode, and the game medium to the specific area A first round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing a first round game that makes passage relatively difficult a predetermined number of times, and the specific game In the state, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode, and a specific second round game that makes it relatively easy to pass the game medium to the specific area can be executed a predetermined number of times. Two-round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61) and music pattern selection means (for example, for selecting a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when controlled by the specific game state control means to the specific game state) A game machine comprising: a sub CPU 71); and a music output means (for example, a speaker 10) that outputs music corresponding to the music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special gaming state. As for the gaming state, the first round game of the first specific number of times (for example, 4 times of 1 to 4R) is performed by the first round game execution means. A first specific gaming state in which at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game executing means after being executed (for example, a big hit gaming state corresponding to a hit pattern 3), After the first specific number of times of the first round game has been executed by the round game execution means, the second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means (for example, hit pattern 8 The music pattern selection means is controlled to the first specific game state by the specific game state control means, the first music pattern (for example, music pattern A) (Reversal)) can be selected, and when the second game state is controlled by the specific game state control means, the second music pattern (for example, , Music pattern A (failure)) can be selected, and for the first music pattern, a first common part of a predetermined music (for example, A melody in the first section) is output by the music output means. It is a predetermined music pattern that a specific part (for example, reverse of the fifth section) of the predetermined music is output after the elapse of a branch period (for example, the first branch section), and the second The music pattern is determined in advance that the first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branch period has elapsed. The music output means has a predetermined time (e.g., when the music pattern selection means selects either the first music pattern or the second music pattern). When the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means at the predetermined time, the output of the predetermined music is started from the waiting time before the start of the 1Rth start of the initial section. In addition, the gaming machine is a time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the specific second round game is started by the second round game execution means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even in the first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed and in the second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed, a predetermined music (for example, A first common part (for example, A melody in the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is passed. Then, in the first specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) that suggests that the specific second round game is executed is output after the elapse of the predetermined branch period. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation in a specific gaming state.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, a predetermined time (for example, an initial section) at which the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music is started. Since it is configured such that the output of a predetermined music (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from the waiting time before the start of the 1Rth when the game starts, it becomes unnecessary to monitor the round game It is possible to prevent the control burden from increasing.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific game state is the second specific number of times (for example, 8 times of 1 to 8R) greater than the first specific number of times by the first round game executing means. A third specific game state in which at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means after the first round game is executed (for example, a big hit game state corresponding to a hit pattern 1); A fourth specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after the second specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means (for example, And the music pattern selection means is controlled to the third specific game state by the specific game state control means. In this case, when a third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)) can be selected and controlled by the specific game state control means to the fourth specific game state, a fourth music pattern ( For example, the music pattern A (failure)) can be selected, and the third music pattern has the first common part of the predetermined music output by the music output means and the predetermined branch period has elapsed. Thereafter, after the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is output and a specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) has elapsed, the predetermined music It is a music pattern in which it is predetermined that a specific part (for example, rust in the third section) is output, and the fourth music pattern has the first common part of the predetermined music by the music output means. output The second common part of the predetermined music is further output after the predetermined branch period has elapsed, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the specific branch period has elapsed. Is a predetermined music pattern, and the music output means starts from the predetermined time when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The output of the predetermined music is started, and when the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection unit, the second round game execution unit executes the specific second round game at the predetermined time. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein it is time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution is started.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific gaming states, the first common portion (for example, the first section) of the predetermined music (for example, the music according to the music pattern A). A melody) is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is allowed to elapse. Here, in the first specific game state, after the elapse of the predetermined branch period, a specific portion of a predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) that suggests that the specific second round game is executed is output. In the third specific gaming state or the fourth gaming state, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) is output. ). Then, in the third specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, rust in the third section) that indicates that the specific second round game is executed is output after the specific branch period has elapsed. . With this configuration, the player's expectation in the specific gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupied when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection unit is selected. The degree of expectation for selecting the third music pattern when the music pattern selection unit selects either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is higher than the degree of expectation. The gaming machine described above, which is configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupying when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200) is selected. The third music pattern occupying when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) is selected rather than the expectation (for example, 18/35). By configuring a higher expectation degree (for example, 46/62), a second common portion (for example, a B melody in the second section) of a predetermined piece of music after a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) has elapsed. ) Is output, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game will be executed is relatively high, so that the roles of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) can be diversified. In gaming state Kick it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music includes a first music and a second music, and a music pattern corresponding to the first music is selected by the music pattern selection unit. In the case where the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the music pattern selection means rather than the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means, The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game executing means is higher.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific second round game when the music pattern (for example, the music pattern A) corresponding to the first music (for example, the music according to the music pattern A) is selected. The second music (for example, music according to the music pattern B) rather than the expectation level (for example, the ratio in which the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined when the music pattern A is selected) When a corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game (for example, when music pattern B is selected, hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined. The ratio between the music pieces can be changed, and the player's sense of expectation in the specific game state can be further enhanced.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming area provided in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass). 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a variable winning device (for example, the first start port 32, which is provided in the game area and can be varied between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received A winning prize opening 36, a second winning prize opening 37), a starting storage information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of starting storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the starting area, and the starting storage information. It is determined whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device on condition that the starting storage information is stored by the storage means. Special Game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61), identification information display means for variably displaying identification information (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54), and specific game state transition determination According to the determination result by the means, the specific game by the change pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining the change pattern of the identification information variably displayed by the identification information display means and the specific game state transition determining means. The game state is specified on the condition that the change display of the identification information corresponding to the start-up storage information for which the determination result indicating the transition to the state is obtained has been stopped and displayed by the identification information display means Specific gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the gaming state, and a plurality of types of items (for example, plates A to A) ) Correspond to a plurality of expectation types (for example, pseudo-continuous effects, serif effects, cut-in effects, and other promotion (reversal) effects), and when the item is displayed, the specific gaming state transition determination means Item effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 71) for executing an item effect (for example, item pre-reading effect) for notifying the degree of expectation whether or not the determination result for shifting to the specific gaming state has been obtained, and the item Item effect control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the item effect executed by the effect execution means, and the item effect control means determines whether or not to execute the item effect. When performing the item effect by determining according to the variation pattern determined by the pattern determining means, Item effect contents (for example, item pre-read effects 1 to 24) to be executed are determined from a plurality of item effect contents in which the number of items of several types and the expectation levels of the plurality of expectation types are defined. When the number of predetermined items (for example, plate B) defined in the determined item effect content is 0, the expected level of a predetermined expectation type (for example, serif effect) corresponding to the predetermined item A predetermined effect (for example, an effect display based on serif effect data) for which a predetermined expectation level (for example, serif (red)) is notified is executed by the item effect executing means (for example, FIG. 86). When the number of the predetermined items defined in the determined item effect content is 1 or more, the predetermined item is After the expected degree (for example, words (green)) lower than the predetermined expected degree is notified as the expected degree of the corresponding predetermined expected degree type, the predetermined item is notified to the predetermined item. An amusement machine characterized by causing the item effect execution means to execute the predetermined effect for which the predetermined degree of expectation is to be notified based on (for example, performing the process shown in S498 of FIG. 86).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a jackpot notice (change notice to a specific gaming state) that is more varied.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the item effect control unit executes the item effect, a determination result that the specific game state transition determination unit shifts to the specific game state is obtained. The item specified in the content of the item effect determined before the change display of the identification information corresponding to the start storage information is started by the identification information display means (for example, before the change). Including item pre-notification determining means (for example, an item acquisition effect process shown in FIG. 90 by the sub CPU 71) for determining whether to notify the type of the item, and notifying the item type by the item pre-notification determining means. When determined, causing the item effect execution means to execute a prior notification effect that will notify the type of the item. The gaming machine according to the characterized.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when performing a jackpot notice (a notice of transition to a specific gaming state), it is possible to perform a more varied look-ahead effect (an effect based on a start-up memory before execution of change). It becomes possible.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern determination unit is configured such that the specific game is stored when the predetermined number (for example, three) or more of the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage unit. If the determination result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the state transition determination means, a specific variation time (for example, 2000 ms) having a variation time shorter than a normal variation time (for example, 4000 ms) is obtained. When a specific variation pattern associated with the specific variation pattern (for example, a special symbol variation pattern for performing a shortening variation) is determined, and the prior notification determination unit determines the specific variation pattern by the variation pattern determination unit ( For example, if the determination result in S483 of FIG. 85 is YES), the item effect content determined by the item effect content determination means The gaming machine according to above, wherein the defined does not determine whether to notify the type of the item.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even when an item effect (for example, item prefetching effect) is executed, the balance of the effect is lost due to the relationship with the change time (particularly, the shortened change). Can be prevented.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming area provided in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass). 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a variable winning device (for example, the first start port 32, which is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received) A special game state (for example, a big hit game) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device on condition that the game medium passes through the start area and the big prize port 36, the second big prize port 37). A determination result indicating that a transition to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the state) and the specific gaming state transition determination means. In particular, specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition are satisfied (for example, the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state). Then, after the specific game state is ended, a special game state advantageous to a player different from the specific game state (for example, 180 special symbol games are consumed) until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, 180 special symbol games are consumed). For example, special gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that can be controlled to ST gaming state, and game number counting means for counting the number of games in a predetermined section (for example, ST section in ST mode) in the special gaming state ( For example, in the ST management counter) and in the special game state, the specific game state is controlled by the specific game state control means. Based on the specific gaming state number counting means (for example, the ST during the ST game counter) that counts the number of times controlled by the state, the counting result by the gaming number counting means, and the counting result by the specific gaming state number counting means, A story effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for executing a series of story effects in the predetermined section and executing related story effects related to the series of story effects in the specific gaming state, and the story effect execution A game machine comprising story production control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the series of story productions and the related story productions performed by the means, wherein the game number counting means Predetermined number of games in a section (for example, 5 times) is 1 The set includes a set number counting means for counting the number of sets (for example, the process shown in S459 of FIG. 83), and the story effect control means controls the specific gaming state counted by the specific gaming state number counting means. Based on the number of times played, the story progresses in the series of story production units (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 83), and the series of story productions based on the set number counted by the set number counting means. A gaming machine characterized by advancing a story (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 83).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect (for example, a series of story effects) according to the number of consecutive hits in the special gaming state (for example, the value of the ST middle villa counter) and the number of sets. Will progress. In the specific game state, a story effect (for example, a related story effect) related to a story effect (for example, a series of story effects) executed in the special game state is executed. Therefore, the story effect can be appropriately advanced without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect control means in the series of story effects when the determination result that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state is obtained. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the story effect execution means is caused to execute the related story effect according to the progress degree of the story (for example, the value of the management counter during ST).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the specific game state, a story effect (for example, a related story effect) corresponding to the progress degree of the story effect executed in the special game state is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a story effect with an appropriate relationship between the special game state and the specific game state without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the related story effect is an effect of displaying a summary (for example, a synopsis) of the story in the series of story effects according to the degree of progress in the series of story effects. A gaming machine as described above, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story production progresses according to the number of jackpots in the special gaming state (for example, the value of the ST during the range of villas), the next series of stories It is possible to perform a related story production in a specific gaming state with the production content of the production and the production content that does not cause a habit.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect executing means is configured to use a first image (for example, a story) corresponding to the current set number counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects. First image display means (for example, the set story display area 703) for displaying images 703a and 703b), and stories corresponding to the number of sets from the next time counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects. Second image display means (for example, schedule set window display area 704) for displaying a second image (for example, window images 704a and 704b) suggesting the image, and the related story effect is the series of story effects. The second image and the second image according to the degree of progress in The gaming machine according to above, wherein the story corresponding (e.g., scenes and description of the scenes) is a demonstration for displaying on.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a series of story production progresses according to the number of jackpots in the special gaming state (for example, the value of the ST during the range of villas), the next series of stories The related story effect in the specific gaming state can be performed with the effect content and the effect content that does not cause the habit, and the second image (for example, window image) used in the series of story effects is also used in the related story effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the effect image data and secure more storage areas.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming area provided in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass). 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a variable winning device (for example, the first start port 32, which is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received) A special game state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable prize device on condition that the game medium passes through the start area and the big prize port 36, the second big prize port 37). Specific game state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the gaming state), and identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, the second special state) Symbol display part 5 ), A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information that is variably displayed by the identification information display means according to a determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means, and the specific Specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, provided that a determination result for shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the game state transition determination means; When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state), after the specific game state is ended, the game state is changed to a special game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state. Special gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) to be controlled, and a predetermined section (for example, S in the special gaming state) Based on the count result of the game number counting means (for example, a management counter during ST) and the number of game count counting means, a story effect that executes a series of story effects in the predetermined interval A gaming machine comprising execution means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) and story effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the series of story effects executed by the story effect execution means. When the determination result indicating that the transition to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination unit is not obtained in the predetermined section, the variation pattern determination unit has a first variation time (for example, 2s) corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern indicating a shortening fluctuation) is high. If the determination result indicating that the transition to the specific gaming state is made by the specific gaming state transition determination means is obtained in the predetermined section, the first variation time longer than the first variation time is obtained. A second variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern indicating super reach) corresponding to two variation times (for example, 30 s) can be determined, and the game number counting means can determine a predetermined number of games (for example, the predetermined interval). 5 times) as one set, a set number counting means for counting the number of sets (for example, the process shown in S459 of FIG. 83) and an in-set game number counting means for counting the number of games in the one set (for example, The story effect control means is configured to set the number of sets counted by the set number counting means. Then, the story in the series of story effects is advanced (for example, the process shown in S460 of FIG. 83), and the first variation time is multiplied by the predetermined number of games in the predetermined section (for example, 10 s). , And a story corresponding to the number of sets in the series of story effects (the effect within the set) is advanced based on the basic effect time. When the variation pattern is determined, the remaining performance time is determined based on the count result by the in-set game number counting means and the basic performance time, and the second variation time is longer than the remaining performance time. It is determined whether it is time (for example, the processing of S473 in FIG. 84 is performed) and the remaining effect time When it is determined that the second variation time is a long time (for example, when the determination result of S473 in FIG. 84 is NO), the set corresponding to the end of the second variation time is performed. By suggesting the number by a special effect mode (for example, an effect mode in which a window image suggesting an in-set effect of the effect end target set is displayed in a display mode different from the normal), the specific game state transition determining means A gaming machine for notifying that a determination result for shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the production time of a series of story effects executed over a plurality of games and the variation time of the identification symbol are generally synchronized with a simple configuration with one set as one unit. Even if it is decided that the game will be shifted to a specific game state (for example, to be a big hit) in the middle of a series of story productions, the series of story productions will be made as much as possible. It is possible to make a jackpot notice (a notice of transition to a specific gaming state) that will make the game progress and improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect control means is a portion corresponding to the number of sets (for example, an effect end target set) that is the target suggested by the special effect mode in the series of story effects. The game machine according to the above, wherein a control for advancing the story is executed so as to synchronize with the end of the second variation time.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if it is determined to shift to a specific gaming state in the middle of the story production executed over a plurality of games, the story production is as much as possible. A jackpot notice can be made that will progress without coming and that will enhance the interest of the player.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the story effect executing means is configured to use a first image (for example, a story) corresponding to the current set number counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects. First image display means (for example, the set story display area 703) for displaying images 703a and 703b), and stories corresponding to the number of sets from the next time counted by the set number counting means in the series of story effects. Second image display means (for example, schedule set window display area 704) for displaying a second image (for example, window images 704a and 704b) suggesting the image, and the story effect control means has the special effect. The second corresponding to the number of sets targeted by the aspect Pictures, gaming machine described above, wherein the displaying by the display mode different from the normal.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make a jackpot notice that further enhances the interest by using a window image (second image) that suggests a story corresponding to the number of sets after the next time. It becomes possible.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming area provided in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass). 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a first variable winning device (for example, provided in the game area, which can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received) The first big prize opening 36) and a first area that is provided in the gaming area and can be changed between a first mode that easily accepts game media and a second mode that hardly accepts game media. , A second variable winning device (for example, the second big prize opening 37) having a specific area 38A) and a specific gaming state (for example, advantageous to the player) on the condition that the game medium has passed through the starting area , The jackpot gaming state) A gaming state on condition that a specific gaming state transition judging means (for example, the main CPU 61) for judging whether or not to make a judgment result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition judging means. Specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and after the specific game state is ended on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, Special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling to a special gaming state (for example, probability variation / short time gaming state) in which the determination result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state is relatively easily obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means ) And the first round game for changing the first variable prize-winning device to the first mode and the second mode in the specific gaming state a predetermined number of times. First round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61) that can be executed, and in the specific game state, a second round game that changes the second variable prize-winning device to the first mode and the second mode can be executed a predetermined number of times. A music pattern selection means (for example, a music pattern selection means (for example, main CPU 61) and a music pattern selection means for selecting a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when controlled by the specific game state control means to the specific game state) , Sub CPU 71), music output means (for example, speaker 10) for outputting music according to the music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special game state, and a game medium in a predetermined period of the specific game state A gaming machine comprising a winning rate determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for determining the winning rate of The second round game execution means is capable of performing a specific second round game that makes it relatively easy for a game medium to pass through the specific area during the execution of the second round game. The game state is determined by the second round game executing means after the first round game is executed by the first round game executing means for the first specific number of times (for example, 4 times 1 to 4R). The first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed (for example, the big hit game state corresponding to the hit pattern 3), and the first specific number of times of the first round game by the first round game execution means. After the execution, the second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means (for example, a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8) The music pattern selection means can select a first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse)) when controlled to the first specific game state by the specific game state control means. Yes, when the specific game state control means controls the second specific game state, a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected, and the first music pattern is selected. When selecting, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold, a predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse) long) is selected, and When the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, the time for which the predetermined music is output by the music output means rather than the predetermined first music pattern. In contrast, when a specific first music pattern (music pattern A (reverse rotation) short) that is a short time is selected and the second music pattern is selected, the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means Is less than the predetermined threshold, a predetermined second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure) long) is selected, and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold. In this case, a specific second music pattern (music pattern A () in which the time for outputting the predetermined music by the music output means is relatively shorter than the predetermined second music pattern. Failed) Short) is selected, and in the first music pattern, the music output means outputs the first common part of the predetermined music (for example, A melody in the first section) and the predetermined branch period (for example, , The first branch section) is a music pattern that is predetermined to output a specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, the reverse of the fifth section), the second music pattern, It is a predetermined music pattern that the first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branch period has elapsed. The music output means has a predetermined time (for example, the 1R-th time when the initial section is started), regardless of which of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. The output of the predetermined music is started from a waiting time before the start), and the predetermined time is determined when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. Gaming machine, characterized in that a round-game execution means before the execution of the specific second round game is started, the output of the particular portion of the predetermined musical composition is capable time starts.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll and a starting area (for example, gaming media that can be passed through the gaming area). The first start port 32, the second start port 33), and the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, which are provided in the game area, can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received. It is advantageous to the player on condition that the variable winning device (for example, the big winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 117) having a possible specific area (for example, the specific area 38A) and the game medium pass through the starting area. Specific game state transition determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, big hit game state), and the specific game state transition determination means for transition to the specific game state. On the condition that the determination result is obtained, the specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state After the specific game state is over, the special game state (for example, probability change / short-time game state) is relatively easy to obtain a determination result to the effect that the specific game state transition determination means shifts to the specific game state. Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) to be controlled) and in the specific game state, the first variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode, and the game medium to the specific area A first round game execution means (for example, the main CPU 61) capable of executing a first round game that makes passage relatively difficult a predetermined number of times, and the specific game In the state, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode, and a specific second round game that makes it relatively easy to pass the game medium to the specific area can be executed a predetermined number of times. Two-round game execution means (for example, main CPU 61) and music pattern selection means (for example, for selecting a music pattern from a plurality of music patterns when controlled by the specific game state control means to the specific game state) Sub CPU 71), music output means (for example, speaker 10) for outputting music in accordance with the music pattern selected by the music pattern selection means in the special game state, and game media for a predetermined period in the specific game state A gaming machine comprising a winning rate determining means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for determining a winning rate, wherein the specific game The state is determined by the second round game executing means after the first round game is executed by the first round game executing means for the first specific number of times (for example, 4 times 1 to 4R). A first specific game state in which a specific second round game is executed (for example, a big hit game state according to a hit pattern 3), and the first round game is executed by the first specific number of times by the first round game execution means. And a second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means (for example, a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 8), the music pattern selection means When the specific game state control means controls the first specific game state, the first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse)) can be selected. When the specific game state control means controls the second specific game state, a second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)) can be selected, and the first music pattern When the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold, a predetermined first music pattern (for example, music pattern A (reverse) long) is selected, When the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold, the time during which the predetermined music is output by the music output means is relatively longer than the predetermined first music pattern. When a specific first music pattern (music pattern A (reverse rotation) short) that is a short time is selected and the second music pattern is selected, the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means If it is less than the predetermined threshold, a predetermined second music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure) long) is selected, and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold. In some cases, a specific second music pattern (music pattern A (failure) in which the time for which the predetermined music is output by the music output means is relatively shorter than the predetermined second music pattern. ) Short) is selected, and the first music pattern is output by the music output means as a first common part of the predetermined music (for example, A melody in the first section), and a predetermined branch period (for example, The predetermined music piece (for example, the reverse of the fifth section) is output after a lapse of the first branch section), and the second music pattern is Music out The first common part of the predetermined music is output by the force means, and the specific part of the predetermined music is not output after the predetermined branch period has elapsed. The music output means has a predetermined time (for example, before the start of the 1Rth when the initial section starts), regardless of which of the first music pattern and the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means. Output of the predetermined music from the waiting time), and when the first music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means, the predetermined time is output by the second round game execution means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is time when the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music can be started before the execution of the specific second round game is started.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even in the first specific game state in which the specific second round game is executed and in the second specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed, a predetermined music (for example, A first common part (for example, A melody in the first section) of the music corresponding to the music pattern A is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is passed. Then, in the first specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) that suggests that the specific second round game is executed is output after the elapse of the predetermined branch period. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation in a specific gaming state.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, before the execution of the specific second round game is started, a predetermined time (for example, an initial section) at which the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music is started. Since it is configured such that the output of a predetermined music (for example, the output of the intro of the initial section) is started from the waiting time before the start of the 1Rth when the game starts, it becomes unnecessary to monitor the round game It is possible to prevent the control burden from increasing.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to produce a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) that matches the player's gaming tendency (game progress speed) and output a predetermined music piece. And the end of the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) can be more easily synchronized.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific game state is the second specific number of times (for example, 8 times of 1 to 8R) greater than the first specific number of times by the first round game executing means. A third specific game state in which at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means after the first round game is executed (for example, a big hit game state corresponding to a hit pattern 1); A fourth specific game state in which the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means after the second specific number of times of the first round game is executed by the first round game execution means (for example, And the music pattern selection means is controlled to the third specific game state by the specific game state control means. In this case, when a third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (success)) can be selected and controlled by the specific game state control means to the fourth specific game state, a fourth music pattern ( For example, if music pattern A (failure)) can be selected and the third music pattern is selected, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is less than a predetermined threshold, the predetermined If the third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (successful) long) is selected and the winning rate determined by the winning rate determining means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, the predetermined third A specific third music pattern (for example, music pattern A (successful) short) is selected in which the time for which the predetermined music is output by the music output means is relatively shorter than the music pattern. When the fourth music pattern is selected, if the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is less than a predetermined threshold, a predetermined fourth music pattern (for example, music pattern A (failure)). If the winning rate determined by the winning rate determination means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, the predetermined music is output by the music output means rather than the predetermined fourth music pattern. A specific fourth music pattern (music pattern A (failure) short) that is a relatively short time is selected, and the third music pattern is selected from the predetermined music by the music output means. After the first common part is output and the predetermined branch period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music (for example, B melody in the second section) is further output, and a specific branch period (for example, First It is a predetermined music pattern that the specific portion of the predetermined music (for example, the rust of the third section) is output after the elapse of two branch sections), and the fourth music pattern is The first common part of the predetermined music is output by the music output means, and after the predetermined branch period has elapsed, the second common part of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period is It is a music pattern in which it is determined in advance that the specific portion of the predetermined music is not output after the lapse of time, and the music output means is configured to output the third music pattern and the fourth music by the music pattern selection means. Regardless of which pattern is selected, output of the predetermined music is started from the predetermined time, and the third music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection means at the predetermined time. When the game is selected, the second round game execution means can start the output of the specific portion of the predetermined music before the execution of the specific second round game is started. A gaming machine as described above, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in any of the first to fourth specific gaming states, the first common portion (for example, the first section) of the predetermined music (for example, the music according to the music pattern A). A melody) is output, and a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) is allowed to elapse. Here, in the first specific game state, after the elapse of the predetermined branch period, a specific portion of a predetermined music (for example, reverse of the fifth section) that suggests that the specific second round game is executed is output. In the third specific gaming state or the fourth gaming state, the second common part (for example, B melody of the second section) of the predetermined music is further output, and the specific branch period (for example, the second branch section) is output. ). Then, in the third specific game state, a specific part of a predetermined music (for example, rust in the third section) that indicates that the specific second round game is executed is output after the specific branch period has elapsed. . With this configuration, the player's expectation in the specific gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupied when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected by the music pattern selection unit is selected. The degree of expectation for selecting the third music pattern when the music pattern selection unit selects either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is higher than the degree of expectation. The gaming machine described above, which is configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first music pattern occupying when either the first music pattern or the second music pattern is selected (for example, 18 + 17 = 35/200) is selected. The third music pattern occupying when either the third music pattern or the fourth music pattern is selected (for example, 46 + 16 = 62/200) is selected rather than the expectation (for example, 18/35). By configuring a higher expectation degree (for example, 46/62), a second common portion (for example, a B melody in the second section) of a predetermined piece of music after a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) has elapsed. ) Is output, the degree of expectation that the specific second round game will be executed is relatively high, so that the roles of a predetermined branch period (for example, the first branch section) can be diversified. In gaming state Kick it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the predetermined music includes a first music and a second music, and a music pattern corresponding to the first music is selected by the music pattern selection unit. In the case where the music pattern corresponding to the second music is selected by the music pattern selection means rather than the expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means, The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the degree of expectation that the specific second round game is executed by the second round game executing means is higher.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specific second round game when the music pattern (for example, the music pattern A) corresponding to the first music (for example, the music according to the music pattern A) is selected. The second music (for example, music according to the music pattern B) rather than the expectation level (for example, the ratio in which the hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined when the music pattern A is selected) When a corresponding music pattern (for example, music pattern B) is selected, the expected degree of execution of the specific second round game (for example, when music pattern B is selected, hit pattern 1 or 3 is determined. The ratio between the music pieces can be changed, and the player's sense of expectation in the specific game state can be further enhanced.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming area provided in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass). 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a variable winning device (for example, the first start port 32, which is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received) A special game state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable prize device on condition that the game medium passes through the start area and the big prize port 36, the second big prize port 37). A specific gaming state transition determining means (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to the gaming state), and a determination result indicating that the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means. Article In addition, specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state) Special game state control means for controlling to a special game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times) after the end of the specific game state ( For example, after a predetermined number of games have been performed in the special game state with the main CPU 61), a normal game state (for example, a normal game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and the special game state. Normal gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the gaming state (non-probability change / non-short time)), the specific gaming state, and the special gaming card And in the normal gaming state, a story effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for executing an effect related to a specific story, and an effect related to the specific story executed by the story effect execution means. Story effect control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress, and the specific story is at least a first story (for example, the first story) and a second story (for example, the second story). The story effect control means includes a first effect control state in which an effect related to the first story is executed by at least the story effect execution means, and the second effect effect execution means executes the second effect control means. A second effect control state in which an effect related to the story is executed, Including an effect control state transition control means for transitioning from the first effect control state to the second effect control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, wherein the predetermined transition condition is the specific game in the special game state. A gaming machine comprising: being controlled to the normal gaming state by the normal gaming state control means without being controlled to the specific gaming state by the state control means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a story effect with appropriate relevance in a plurality of gaming states, and even when a state advantageous to the player ends, By making the story progress, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll and a starting area (for example, gaming media that can be passed through the gaming area). , A first start port 32, a second start port 33) and a variable winning device (for example, provided in the game area, which can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received) A specific gaming state (for example, advantageous to the player by changing the variable winning device, on condition that the game medium has passed through the start area and the first grand prize opening 36, the second big prize opening 37) , A specific gaming state transition determination unit (for example, main CPU 61) that determines whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, and a determination result indicating that the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination unit. This And a specific gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to the specific gaming state (for example, the main CPU 61), and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the gaming medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state). In this case, a special game state control for controlling to a special game state (for example, ST game state) different from the specific game state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 180 times) after the specific game state is ended. After the means (for example, the main CPU 61) and the predetermined number of games are played in the special game state, the normal game state (for example, more disadvantageous to the player than the specific game state and the special game state) Normal game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling to the normal game state (non-probability change / non-short time)), the specific game state, the special game state In the skill state and the normal gaming state, story effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4) for executing effects related to a specific story and the specific story executed by the story effect execution means Story production control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the progression of the production, and the specific story is at least a first story (for example, the first story) and a second story (for example, the second story). The story effect control means includes a first effect control state in which an effect related to the first story is executed by at least the story effect execution means and the story effect execution means A second effect control state in which an effect related to the second story is executed, Including an effect control state transition control means for transitioning from the first effect control state to the second effect control state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, wherein the predetermined transition condition is the specific game state transition control; A gaming machine characterized by being controlled to the specific gaming state by means, or being controlled to the special gaming state by the special gaming state transition control means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a story production with appropriate relevance in a plurality of gaming states, and a specific story progresses when the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board (for example, gaming board 1) having a gaming area in which gaming media can roll, and a starting area (for example, a first gaming area provided in the gaming area through which gaming media can pass). 1 start port 32, second start port 33) and a variable winning device (for example, the first start port 32, which is provided in the game area and can be changed between a first mode in which a game medium is easily received and a second mode in which a game medium is not easily received) A special game state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player by changing the variable prize device on condition that the game medium passes through the start area and the big prize port 36, the second big prize port 37). Specific game state transition determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to shift to the gaming state), and identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information (for example, the first special symbol display unit 53, the second special state) Symbol display part 5 ), A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining a variation pattern of the identification information that is variably displayed by the identification information display means according to a determination result by the specific gaming state transition determining means, and the specific Specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state, provided that a determination result for shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the game state transition determination means; A predetermined gaming state control means for controlling to a predetermined gaming state (for example, ST gaming state) different from the specific gaming state when the condition is satisfied (for example, when the game medium passes through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state); A set that counts the number of games in one set, with the predetermined number of games as one set in the predetermined game state. Game number counting means (for example, in-set counter) and effect execution means (for example, in-set effect) for executing a predetermined effect (for example, in-set effect) capable of executing a series of effects over the predetermined number of games in the predetermined gaming state , A liquid crystal display device 4) and an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the progress of the predetermined effect, and the variation pattern determining means determines the transition of the specific game state in the predetermined game state. If the determination result indicating the transition to the specific gaming state is not obtained by the means, the first variation pattern (for example, the shortened variation A) corresponding to the specific variation time (for example, 2 s) is highly probable. A determination result indicating that a transition to the specific gaming state is made by the specific gaming state transition determination means in the predetermined gaming state. The second variation pattern (for example, special variations A to E) different from the first variation pattern can be determined, and the effect control means can determine the predetermined number of games during the specific variation time. A time (for example, 10 s) multiplied by is used as a basic effect time, and the effect execution unit executes the predetermined effect based on the basic effect time, and the variation pattern determining unit is When the determination result indicating that the game state transition determination unit shifts to the specific game state is obtained, the game state transition determination unit synchronizes with the end of the predetermined effect based on the count result by the in-set game number counting unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the second variation pattern corresponding to the variation time can be determined with high probability.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the effect time of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in a set) in which a series of effects are executed over a plurality of games and the variation time of the identification symbol are appropriately set with a simple configuration. Since it is possible to synchronize with a certain game state without increasing the control burden and the amount of information stored in the storage area, it is possible to shift to a specific game state in the middle of a predetermined performance (a big hit) Even if it is determined, it is possible to advance the predetermined performance without causing a habit as much as possible.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, examples of other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 117 is a perspective view showing a special winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. Note that the same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 117 is provided with only one big prize opening.

  As shown in FIG. 117, a special winning opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. A ball passage 37 </ b> B for guiding a game ball downward is formed inside the special winning opening 37. A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are provided at the lower end of the spherical passage 37B so as to be adjacent to the left and right. A prize winning count switch 370 is disposed at a position entering the ball path from the prize winning opening 37. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and a V winning of a game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 ′ that can be displaced to the left and right is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B in the spherical passage 37B. In FIG. 117, the position indicated by the solid line of the displacement member 39 ′ is the position after displacement, and the position indicated by the phantom line of the displacement member 39 ′ in FIG. 117 is the initial position.

  The displacement member 39 ′ switches the specific area 38A to an open state or a closed state. As shown by a solid line in FIG. 117, when the displacement member 39 ′ is at the leftmost fixed position farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened, and the V-winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is made. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39 ′ forms a gap through which the game ball can sufficiently pass between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B. Thereby, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 ′, and can pass through the specific region 38A. is there. Further, when the displacement member 39 ′ is in the left fixed position, a gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 ′. Thereby, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 ′ and pass through the non-specific region 38B.

  When the specific area is opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. Further, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member that allows the game ball to pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member that prevents the game ball from passing through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be fixed at any one of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, if the displacement member is placed at the second position, the game ball will always pass through the specific area if it wins the big prize opening. Mode can be provided.

  On the other hand, as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 117, when the displacement member 39 ′ is in the right position closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the game ball to the specific area 38A is closed. The V prize is made impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39 ′ forms a gap through which the game ball can pass between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B. Thereby, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the space between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 ′, and must always pass through the non-specific region 38B. Become.

  Even in a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39 ′, the game can be shifted to a promiscuous gaming state or the like after the jackpot gaming state in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state. That is, according to the big prize opening 37 shown in FIG. 117, even if only one big prize opening (variable prize winning device) is provided, it is relatively difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 38A. Since it is possible to execute one round game and a specific second round game that makes it relatively easy for a game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, two large winning openings (variable winning devices) are provided on the game board. ) Even if it is difficult to secure a space for installing, depending on the opening pattern of the special winning opening (variable winning device) in the specific gaming state, it is easy to shift to the special gaming state, or It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a gaming property of being difficult.

  FIG. 118 is a view showing a special winning opening / closing pattern (modification) of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the special winning opening / closing pattern of FIG. 118. 118 and 119 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 117.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the modified example of the special prize opening / closing pattern is basically the same as the special prize opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 53, and is applied to one special prize opening provided with a specific area. It is a possible big opening and closing pattern. In such a special winning opening / closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 119, the displacement member 39 ′ for opening / closing the specific area 38A is activated only at the 10R as an example, and is in a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. Become. On the other hand, in the 1st to 9Rth and 11th to 16Rths, the displacement member 39 ′ is in an unactuated state and is in a position indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a big winning opening / closing pattern is applied to one big winning opening, it is possible to realize the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process for a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special symbol control process is a pachinko gaming machine in which only one big winning opening is provided but no specific area is provided, and the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to a probable gaming state according to the type of jackpot symbol Applies to

  As shown in FIG. 120, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining the presence or absence of start memory. In this process, if the main CPU determines that there is no memory for starting the special symbol game, that is, if no data is stored in the special symbol starting storage area (0) to the special symbol starting storage area (4), the data is stored. This process is repeated until it is stored. On the other hand, if the main CPU determines that there is a start-up memory, it moves the process to S1001.

  In S1001, the main CPU executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU determines whether or not the number of jackpot judgment values is large or the number of jackpot judgment values is small, depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates a probabilistic gaming state. Refer to the jackpot determination table. Further, the main CPU refers to the random number value for hit determination in the special symbol start storage area and the selected jackpot determination table, which is extracted when the game ball is won. The main CPU determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. In other words, the main CPU determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, either the big hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S1002.

  In S1002, the main CPU determines whether or not the determination result in S1001 is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S1003. On the other hand, if the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, if it is determined that it is not a big hit, the process moves to S1000.

  In S1003, the main CPU controls the big hit gaming state. That is, the main CPU performs a special winning opening open display command, a special winning opening open data setting, and the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S1004.

  In S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the big hit gaming state executed in S1003 is based on a special symbol for the probable big hit. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol for the probable big hit, the process proceeds to S1006. If it is determined that the symbol is not based on the special symbol for the probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to S1005.

  In S1005, the main CPU performs control of the non-probability variable gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state that started the control in S1003. In other words, in the big hit gaming state based on a special symbol other than the probability variation big hit, the game shifts to the non-probable variation gaming state after the end. When shifting to such a non-probability game state, the main CPU shifts the process to S1000 again.

  In S1006, the main CPU controls the probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state that started the control in S1003. In other words, in the jackpot gaming state based on the special symbol for the probability variation jackpot, the game always shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end. When shifting to such a probability change gaming state, the main CPU shifts the process to S1000 again.

  In the pachinko gaming machine to which such a special symbol control process is applied, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game with respect to a round that is easy to win a big prize opening by providing the same production mode as in the above-described embodiment.

<Summary of the invention>
In the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-211401), the movable accessory can move between the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area. The movable accessory can be easily moved. By the way, in the first place, since the space for installing the movable accessory is limited inside the gaming machine, when the movable accessory moves even at the standby position inside the gaming machine, the movable accessory is installed at the standby position. It is difficult to secure space.

  In particular, the size and number of movable accessories are determined according to the space that the gaming machine has, so if the space that the gaming machine has can be used effectively, the movable accessory can be enlarged and the effect of the movable accessory can be increased. It can be further enhanced.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which a gaming medium rolls, and a movable accessory provided on the gaming board and movable to execute a predetermined movable effect. (Lower movable production member 101B), a winning opening (first start opening 32) that is provided on the game board so as to be positioned in front of the movable accessory and through which the game medium can be won, and passes through the winning opening A game medium passage (ball passages 203, 204, 206) for discharging the played game medium from the front of the movable accessory to the back surface of the game board through the lower portion of the movable accessory, and the movable accessory is on standby A movable effect that can move at least in the direction of the game medium passage located below the movable accessory at a position can be executed, and in the state where the movable accessory is moved at the standby position, the game medium passage is The movable part from the front of It has a configuration which is provided for so as to pass under.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in a state where the movable accessory is movable at the standby position, the game medium passage is provided so as to pass from the front of the movable accessory to the lower side of the movable accessory. It is possible to secure a space in which the accessory can move. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance by the movable accessory while ensuring a sufficient installation space for the movable accessory.

  In addition, since a large space for the movable accessory can be secured, the movable accessory can be enlarged and the movable range of the movable accessory at the standby position can be expanded, and the performance by the movable accessory can be improved more effectively. be able to.

  Furthermore, by installing the winning opening in front of the movable winning combination, it becomes possible for the player who has visually recognized the winning opening during the game to visually recognize the movable winning combination existing behind the winning opening. For this reason, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the movable accessory on the player.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the movable accessory performs a movable effect that is movable so as to expand radially in the standby position.
If it does in this way, the movable range of a movable combination can be expanded and the production effect by a movable combination can be improved more effectively.

  In particular, in a state where the movable accessory moves at the standby position, the game medium passage is provided so as to pass under the movable accessory from the front of the movable accessory, so that the movable accessory can move at the standby position. Therefore, the movable accessory can be moved so as to expand in a wider range in the radial direction. As a result, the movable accessory can be moved dynamically, and the performance by the movable accessory can be enhanced more effectively.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided at the rear of the gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) in which a gaming medium rolls and moves to a standby position and a movable position. A movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect, and a prize that is provided on the game board so as to be positioned in front of the movable accessory so that a game medium can be won. A gaming machine comprising a mouth (first start port 32) and a game medium passage (ball passages 203, 204, 206) for discharging the game medium won in the winning opening through the front of the movable accessory. The movable accessory has a plurality of movable parts (outer ring members 117) that are separated from each other in the circumferential direction via gaps (121), and at the standby position, the movable part is circumferentially arranged through the gaps. A first position spaced apart and at least radially outward Provided so as to move in the second position, the game medium passage is provided so as to pass through the gap.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the game medium discharge passage is provided so as to pass through the gap of the movable part of the movable accessory, so that a space in which the movable accessory can move can be ensured at the standby position. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance by the movable accessory while ensuring a sufficient installation space for the movable accessory.

  In addition, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory and expand the movable accessory at the standby position, and it is possible to more effectively improve the performance by the movable accessory. .

  Furthermore, by installing the winning opening in front of the movable winning combination, it becomes possible for the player who has visually recognized the winning opening during the game to visually recognize the movable winning combination existing behind the winning opening. For this reason, it is possible to more effectively improve the effect of the movable accessory on the player.

  In addition, since the game medium passage can be installed in front of the movable accessory while avoiding the movable part, the game board can be prevented from becoming larger in the vertical direction, and the installation space for the game board can be reduced.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) on which a gaming medium rolls, a rear position of the gaming board, a standby position and a movable position. And a movable combination (lower movable production member 101B) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable production, and a first winning port provided on the game board and allowing a game medium to be won ( A gaming machine provided with a first start port 32) and a second winning port (general winning ports 40A to 40C) provided in the game board and capable of winning game media, the first winning port The game medium won in the first prize passage (ball paths 204 and 206) for discharging the game medium won in the second prize through the lower part of the movable accessory and the game medium won in the second prize opening are discharged through the lower part of the movable prize. A second passage (sphere passage 212) and a first passage A first sensor (first starter switch 320) for detecting a game medium passing through the first passage and rolling in a first direction; and provided in the second passage. And a second sensor (general winning hole sensor 400A) for detecting a game medium that rolls in a second direction different from the first direction, wherein the first sensor is in front of the second sensor. The magnetic detection sensor (magnetic sensor 214) is provided so as to be positioned between the first passage and the second passage below the movable accessory. The passage and the second passage have a configuration in which a downstream area where the game medium is discharged merges.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first passage is provided with the first sensor for detecting the game medium rolling in the first direction, and the second passage is different from the first direction. A second sensor for detecting a game medium that rolls in the direction is provided, and the first passage and the second passage are joined together in a horizontal direction and an up-and-down direction, for example, because the downstream area where the game medium is discharged joins. It is possible to install the first passage and the second passage in different directions such as directions, and to merge the first passage and the second passage.

  In addition to this, the first sensor is installed in front of the second sensor, and the magnetic detection sensor is provided between the first passage and the second passage below the movable accessory. Three sensors including one sensor, a second sensor, and a magnetic detection sensor can be installed in a small space below the movable accessory.

  For this reason, it is possible to improve the performance by the movable accessory while ensuring a sufficient installation space for the movable accessory.

  Moreover, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, the movable accessory can be increased in size, and the rendering performance of the movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided behind the gaming board (1) having a gaming area (1p) in which gaming media rolls, and is movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect. Movable movable object (lower movable effect member 101B), a prize opening provided on the game board and allowing a game medium to be won (first start port 32), and the game medium won in the prize opening are discharged downstream. A prize opening unit (first start port member 202) having an upstream game medium passage (203, 204) and an illuminating electric circuit board (215), and a game medium discharged to the upstream game medium passage, A game medium passage portion (ball passage unit 205) in which a downstream game medium passage (ball passage 206) for discharging through the lower part of the movable accessory is formed; and the downstream game medium passage provided in the downstream game medium passage. Game media passing through the passage A game medium detection member (first start port switch 320) for detecting a game machine and a wiring (cable 216) connected to the electric circuit board, and located above the game medium detection member In this way, a support part (protrusion 217) that is provided on the upper surface of the game medium passage part and supports the wiring extending from the electrical decoration board, and the movable accessory and the game medium so as to cover the upper part of the support part It is comprised from the thing provided with the coating | coated member (semi-cylindrical member 219) provided between the channel | path parts.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the upstream game medium passage and the downstream game medium passage can be passed from the front of the movable accessory to the lower portion of the movable accessory, and a space for moving the movable accessory is ensured. can do. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance by the movable accessory while ensuring a sufficient installation space for the movable accessory.

  Moreover, since a large installation space for the movable accessory can be secured, the movable accessory can be increased in size, and the rendering performance of the movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

  Moreover, since it has the support part which is provided in the upper surface of the game medium passage part so that it may be located above a game medium detection member, and supports the wiring extended from an electrical decoration board, the wiring extended from an electrical decoration board is a movable accessory It can prevent fluttering down. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the wiring from interfering with the movable accessory when the movable accessory is movable, to move the movable accessory smoothly, and to protect the wiring from the movable accessory.

  Further, since the covering member is provided between the movable accessory and the game medium passage so as to cover the upper portion of the support portion, the wiring and the movable accessory can be shielded by the covering member, and the wiring is connected when the movable accessory is movable. It can prevent more effectively that it interferes with a movable accessory. Further, when the game medium flows down from the movable accessory side, the game medium is allowed to collide with the covering member, so that the game medium can be prevented from colliding with the wiring, and the wiring can be protected from the game medium.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the support portion includes a U-shaped protrusion (217) protruding from the upper surface of the game medium passage portion, and the wiring is supported by the protrusion by a binding member. Preferably it is.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine according to the present invention can firmly fasten the wiring to the protrusion by a binding member such as a binding band, and can more effectively prevent the wiring from flapping below the movable accessory.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-211401), the movable accessory only moves between the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area. Cannot move at the standby position. Thereby, the production effect by a movable accessory cannot be improved further.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (lower movable effect member 101B) that is movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position. The movable accessory has a first movable body (movable body 106) that can move in one direction and the other direction by rotation of a driving member (motor 110A), and a pressing portion (107C). A second movable body (movable body 107) that is movably provided on the movable body and is movable in the one direction and the other direction together with the first movable body, and the other direction together with the second movable body. A movable part (movable body 108) that can be moved to the first movable body, a guide hole (112A), a swingable part provided on the first movable body, and an interlocking part (arm member) that can be pressed by the pressing part. 112) and fitting into the interlocking portion A rotating member (rotating body 114) having a first fitting portion (fitting protrusion 114A) and a plurality of slits (114B) and rotatably provided on the third movable body, and fitted in the plurality of slits A movable member having a second fitting portion (fitting protrusion 115A) to be joined and having movable portions (slider member 115 and outer ring member 117) that are movable at least in the radial direction of the rotating member by the rotation of the rotating member. (109), and in a state where the movable accessory is located at the standby position, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved to the first movable body by rotating the driving member forward from the initial position. Moving in the direction to convert the swinging of the interlocking part into one direction of rotation of the rotating member, allowing only the rotation of the rotating member to move the movable part at least in the radial direction, and driving member By rotating backward from the initial position, the third movable body is moved while moving the first movable body in the other direction to convert the swing of the interlocking portion into the rotation of the rotating member in the one direction. Is moved in the other direction to move the movable accessory to the movable position and move the movable part at least in the radial direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, two different effects, such as an effect of moving the movable accessory at the standby position and an effect of moving while moving from the standby position to the movable position, can be performed with the rotation direction of a single drive member. It can be easily performed only by switching, and the performance by the movable accessory can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-211401), the movable accessory can emit light, but when a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided separately from the movable accessory. Requires a separate light emitting portion on the decorative member, which increases the manufacturing cost of the light emitting element.

  In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (upper movable production member 101A) movable between a standby position and a movable position, and a full color provided in the movable accessory. A first light emitting part (LEDs 160a, 181a to 184a, 195a) which is a light emitter, a colored lens member (front decoration 160) provided on the movable accessory and positioned in front of the first light emitting part; A decorative member (99) provided in front of the movable accessory located at the standby position and capable of transmitting at least backward light forward, and provided behind the decorative member and emitting light to the decorative member. A second light emitting unit (LED 291) that is a monochromatic light emitter, and the first light emitting unit emits light in a state where the movable accessory is located at the standby position, so that the first light emitting unit is visually recognized from the front. Movable character The color can be changed to a color similar to the light emission color of the second light emitting unit, and when the movable accessory is located at the movable position from the standby position, the color is visually recognized from the front of the decorative member. The color of the decorative member can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first light emitting unit emits light in a state where the movable accessory is located at the standby position, thereby changing the color of the movable accessory visually recognized from the front of the second light emitting unit. Since the color can be changed to the same color as the emission color, it is not necessary to provide a light emitting portion on the decorative member, and the decorative member can be caused to emit light by the movable accessory. In addition, the mounting amount of the full-color first light emitting unit can be reduced, and the decorative member can emit light in the same color. As a result, the configuration of the decorative member can be simplified and the manufacturing cost of the decorative member can be reduced.

Moreover, since it is not necessary to ensure the space which provides a light emission part in a decoration member, the space of the depth of a decoration member can fully be ensured.
In addition, when the movable accessory is in the movable position from the standby position, the color of the decorative member visually recognized from the front of the decorative member can be changed, so that various colors can be produced by the movable accessory, Improving the performance of movable accessories.

  Further, for example, if an effect of moving the movable accessory from the standby position to the movable position while emitting light, it is possible to focus on the movable accessory that moves while emitting the player's line of sight. Thereby, the effect of a movable accessory can be made to stand out.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-211401), the movable accessory only moves between the liquid crystal display area and the outside of the liquid crystal display area. The production is monotonous. For this reason, the production effect by a movable accessory cannot be heightened.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory is provided to be movable relative to the first movable base (rear movable base 163) provided movably and a plurality of movable members (left upper blade member). 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175) are provided on the first movable base, and a second movable base (front movable base 164) that swingably supports the first movable base. A first engagement portion (engagement protrusion 163D) and the second movable base are movably provided, and the movable member is moved relative to the second movable base to move the movable member to a first position and a second position. Swing to position 2 A movable base (blade movable rack 165), a second engagement portion (engagement projection 165G) that is provided on the third movable base and can be engaged with the first engagement portion, An urging member (coil spring 171) attached to the second movable base and having the other end attached to the third movable base is provided, and the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position. In this case, the first movable base and the second movable base move so as to extend relatively, and the second engagement portion engages with the first engagement portion. When the third movable base is moved to swing the movable member from the first position to the second position and move from the movable position to the standby position, the biasing member The movable member swings from the second position to the first position It has a configuration that biases the third movable base so.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the second movable base moves so that the first movable base and the second movable base extend relatively. When the engaging portion engages with the first engaging portion, the third movable base is moved to swing the movable member from the first position to the second position. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance by the movable combination with a simple configuration.

  When the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position, the third movable base is urged by the urging member so that the movable member swings from the second position to the first position. Therefore, the movable member can be quickly returned from the second position to the first position. Thereby, the stage performance of a movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) movable to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position, A movable member (a left upper blade member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a right member). A lower wing member 175) and a light-emitting unit (LEDs 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a) provided on the plurality of movable members, wherein the plurality of movable members are at the standby position. The longitudinal direction extends in the first direction, located behind the decorative member, and the light emitting portion is configured to emit light toward the decorative member. Movable position When it moved to have a configuration in which the longitudinal direction are close to move in a second direction perpendicular to the first direction.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that the longitudinal direction extends in the first direction at the standby position behind the decorative member, and the light emitting portion emits light toward the decorative member. When the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the plurality of movable members move close to each other in the second direction orthogonal to the first direction. be able to.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the movable member has an adsorption member that generates an adsorption force, and the movable member is opposed in the left-right direction when moved in the second direction, and It is preferable to be united by being adsorbed by the adsorbing member.

  With this configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is united in a state where the movable member is adsorbed when the movable member moves in the second direction, so that the state where the movable member is united can be stably maintained. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of a movable member etc. can be prevented and the presentation property by a movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) operable to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory has a plurality of main body members (a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, and a front movable base 164), and at least one of the plurality of main body members approaches the other main body member. The movement of the plurality of body members increases, and the movement of at least one of the plurality of body members away from the other body member reduces the overlap of the plurality of body members. The moving mechanism (rack 162A, gears 169A to 169E, projecting portion 16) moves the one main body member so as to approach or leave the other main body member. A) and a movable member (left upper blade member) that can swing between a first position and a second position as the one main body member moves toward or away from the other main body member 172, an upper right blade member 173, a lower left blade member 174, and a lower right blade member 175), and the plurality of body members have guide portions extending along the extending direction of each body member, The first guide portions (guide surfaces 163v and 163w) in one main body member and the second guide portions (guide surfaces 164v and 164w) in a main body member different from the one main body member are opposed to each other. Protruding portions (lower stoppers 163x and 163y) are provided at end portions of at least one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion in the extending direction, and the first guide portion is provided with the first guide portion and the second guide portion. As the movable accessory moves from the standby position toward the movable position, the projecting portion is located on the other of the id portion and the second guide portion. And an inclined surface (190b, 191b) that gradually decreases a separation distance that is a distance between the guide portion and the projecting portion, and when the movable accessory moves to the movable position. The separation distance between the projecting portion and the guide portion facing the projecting portion is the shortest, and the movable member swings from the first position to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the movable accessory moves to the movable position, the separation distance between the protrusion and the guide portion facing the protrusion is the shortest, so the movable accessory is movable from the standby position. When the plurality of main body members overlap with each other with a small length (a plurality of main body members relatively extend) and the end portions in the extending direction of the plurality of main body members overlap each other with a short length, It is possible to firmly connect the main body members. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling from occurring when the movable accessory moves to the movable position.

  Furthermore, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the guide portion of the counterpart body member can be moved along the inclined surface. Thereby, it can be smoothly moved to a state where the overlap between the main body members is small and a state where the overlap is large (a state where the plurality of main body members are relatively contracted), and as a result, the smooth operation of the movable accessory can be performed. It can be carried out.

  Further, when the movable accessory moves to the movable position, the distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion becomes the shortest, and the movable member is moved from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the performance of the movable accessory can be improved more effectively.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-211401), it is considered that a wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light-emitting board, but the wiring is connected to the movable accessory. It is unclear how it is wired.

  As a result, when the movable accessory moves in a complex manner, it is impossible to know how the wiring and the members such as gears that drive the movable accessory are laid out. Can not know if can move smoothly.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory operable to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position, and the movable accessory includes a plurality of movable accessories. It has a main body member (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164), and when at least one of the plurality of main body members moves so as to approach the other main body member, the main body members overlap. And when at least one of the plurality of main body members moves away from the other main body member, the overlapping of the main body members is reduced, and the one main body member is another main body member. A moving mechanism (rack 162A, gear 169A, gears 169B to 169E, projecting portion 164A) for moving the member toward or away from the member, and the one main body member A movable member ((upper left blade member 172, upper right blade member 173, lower left blade member) that can swing between the first position and the second position as it moves closer to or away from the other body member. Part wing member 174 and right lower wing member 175)), a light emitting part (LED 160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a) capable of emitting light, and a wiring (flexible cable 186) connected to the light emitting part, The wiring is locked to the one main body member and the other main body member, and is bent and wired between the one main body member and the other main body member, and the moving mechanism is the one main body member. The main body member or the other main body member is installed on one side with the central axis in the width direction interposed therebetween, and the wiring is installed on the other side.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the wiring is locked between the one main body member and the other main body member, and is bent and wired between the one main body member and the other main body member. When one main body member moves so as to approach or separate from another main body member, the wiring can be smoothly moved while preventing the main body member from floating with respect to the plurality of main body members.

  Furthermore, since the moving mechanism is installed on one side of either the main body member or the other main body member across the width direction central axis, and the wiring is installed on the other side, the wiring is prevented from interfering with the moving mechanism. However, one main body member and another main body member can be moved relative to each other. Thereby, wiring can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-211401), it is considered that a wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light-emitting board, but the wiring is connected to the movable accessory. It is unclear how it is wired.

  As a result, when the movable accessory moves in a complicated manner, it is impossible to know in what state the wiring is accommodated with respect to the movable accessory, and the wiring accommodated in the movable accessory is the accommodation accessory. There is a possibility of flapping inside.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory includes a plurality of main body members (fixed base 162, rear movable base 163, front movable base 164) that move relative to each other, wiring (flexible cable 186) attached to the plurality of main body members, and the plurality of movable members. A projecting portion (198) provided on at least one of the main body members, and the movable accessory generally overlaps so that the plurality of main body members relatively contract at the standby position, In the movable position, the plurality of main body members are partially overlapped so as to relatively extend, and the wiring is connected to the main body member when the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position. It is bent in housed between, and has a configuration to flex by being pressed against the protrusion.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the movable accessory moves from the movable position to the standby position, it is bent and accommodated between the main body members, and is bent by being pressed against the projecting portion. The wiring accommodated by being folded between the plurality of main body members can be further bent by the protruding portion.

  As a result, the length of the wiring accommodated between the plurality of main body members can be increased to reduce the gap between the main body member and the wiring, and the wiring can be prevented from fluttering between the main body members. Can be accommodated stably.

  Further, by further bending the wiring by the protruding portion, it is possible to generate a restoring force that extends straight from the state where the wiring is bent. For this reason, the frictional force between the wiring and the main body member can be increased to more effectively prevent the wiring from fluttering between the main body members, and the wiring can be more stably accommodated by the main body member.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-211401), in the state in which the movable accessory is moved from the liquid crystal display area to the outside of the liquid crystal display area, Not configured to prevent.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 100) operable to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory has a plurality of main body members (a fixed base 162, a rear movable base 163, and a front movable base 164), and at least one of the plurality of main body members approaches the other main body member. The main body member overlap increases when the main body member moves, and the main body member overlap decreases when at least one of the plurality of main body members moves away from the other main body member. The member has a guide portion extending along the extending direction of each main body member, and the first guide portion (guide surfaces 163v and 163w) in at least one main body member; Second guide portions (guide surfaces 164v, 164w) in a main body member different from the one main body member are provided so as to face each other, and the first guide portion and the second guide portion A projecting portion (lower stoppers 163x, 163y) is provided at an end portion in at least one of the extending directions, and is either the first guide portion or the second guide portion, As the movable accessory moves from the standby position toward the movable position, a separation distance that is a distance between the protruding portion and the guide portion facing the protruding portion is provided on the guide portion facing the protruding portion. Are provided with inclined surfaces (190b, 191b) that gradually become narrower.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, as the movable accessory moves from the standby position toward the movable position, the distance between the projecting portion and the guide portion facing the projecting portion faces the projecting portion. It is provided with an inclined surface such that the separation distance is gradually narrowed. Accordingly, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the gap between the protruding portion and the guide portion of the counterpart body member facing the protruding portion can be reduced.

  Thereby, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the overlap of the plurality of main body members is small (the plurality of main body members relatively extend), and the end portions of the plurality of main body members extend in the extending direction. When overlapping with a short length, a plurality of body members can be firmly connected. As a result, it is possible to prevent rattling from occurring when the movable accessory moves to the movable position.

  Furthermore, when the movable accessory moves from the standby position to the movable position, the guide portion of the counterpart body member can be moved along the inclined surface. Thereby, it can be smoothly moved to a state where the overlap between the main body members is small and a state where the overlap is large (a state where the plurality of main body members are relatively contracted).

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-211401), it is considered that a wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light-emitting board, but the wiring is connected to the movable accessory. It is unclear how it is wired. Therefore, no consideration is given to reducing the load applied to the wiring.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 100) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory includes a main body member (case 161), a flexible cable 186 provided on the main body member, and a wiring board (relay board 185) connected to the wiring, and the main body member includes the wiring Are fitted in a first groove (guide groove 187) and a second groove (guide groove 188) extending perpendicular to the extending direction of the first groove and fitting the wiring. The first groove is connected to the second groove from the one end (187a) in the extending direction located at the connection position of the wiring board and the wiring. A bottom surface (187c) inclined toward the portion (187b), The wiring is connected to the main body member by a fastening member (189) at a position where the other end portion in the extending direction of the first groove communicates with one end portion (188a) in the extending direction of the second groove. It has the structure fastened.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first groove extends from one end portion in the extending direction located at the connection position between the wiring board and the wiring toward the other end portion in the extending direction communicating with the second groove. Since the inclined bottom surface is provided, the wiring fitted in the first groove can be extended to the second groove along the inclined bottom surface of the first groove.

  For this reason, the wiring is bent as compared with the case where the inclination of one end in the extending direction of the first groove located at the connection position between the wiring and the wiring substrate is steep (for example, a step having a 90 ° inclination). Can be prevented. For this reason, it can prevent that a load is applied to the connection position of wiring and a wiring board, and can protect wiring.

  Furthermore, the wiring is fastened to the main body member by the fastening member at a position where the other end portion in the extending direction of the first groove communicates with one end portion in the extending direction of the second groove. It is possible to prevent the wiring from fluttering at a bent position where the first groove and the second groove communicate with each other.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-211401), it is considered that a wiring such as a flexible cable is connected to the light-emitting board, but the wiring is connected to the movable accessory. It is unclear how it is wired.

  As a result, when the movable accessory moves in a complex manner, it is impossible to know how the wiring and the members such as gears that drive the movable accessory are laid out. Can not know if can move smoothly.

  In addition, when the movable accessory moves in a complicated manner, it is impossible to know in what state the wiring is accommodated with respect to the movable accessory. There is a possibility of flapping inside.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a movable accessory (upper movable effect member 101A) movable so as to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving between a standby position and a movable position, The movable accessory is movable with respect to the fixed base (162) having a first rack (rack 162A) in which first concave and convex portions (rack teeth 162a) continuous in the longitudinal direction are formed, and the fixed base. A first movable base (rear) having a first gear (gear 169A) that is provided and meshes with the first uneven portion and a second gear (gears 169B to 169E) to which power is transmitted from the first gear. Side movable base 163), a second rack (protruding portion 164A) in which a second concavo-convex portion (rack teeth 164a) meshing with the second gear continuously in the longitudinal direction is formed, and a first engaging portion (Engagement protrusion 163D A second movable base (front movable base 164) that is relatively movable between a position that is relatively extended with respect to the first movable base and a position that is relatively contracted, and the second movable base. A third movable base (blade movable rack 165) which is slidably provided on the movable base and has a second engagement portion (engagement protrusion 165G) which can be engaged with the first engagement portion; , A movable member (left upper blade member 172, upper right blade) provided on the second movable base and capable of swinging between a first position and a second position as the third movable base slides. Member 173, lower left wing member 174 and lower right wing member 175), light emitting portions (LEDs 181a to 184a) provided on the movable member, wiring connected to the light emitting portion (flexible cable 186), and the fixing A base, the first movable base and A protrusion (198) provided on at least one of the second movable bases, and when the movable accessory is in the movable position, the end of the first movable base and the second movable base The fixed base, the first movable base, and the second movable base are relatively extended so as to overlap with an end portion of the base, and the wiring is connected to the fixed base and the second movable base. By being locked to the movable base, the first movable base is bent from the fixed base and extended to the second movable base, and the first gear and the second gear are wired. Is installed on one side with the central axis in the extending direction of the first movable base, and the wiring is arranged on the other side with the central axis in the extending direction of the first movable base, The movable accessory is in the standby position In some cases, the wiring is accommodated by being bent between the fixed base and the first movable base and between the first movable base and the second movable base and pressed against the projecting portion. It has the structure bent by this.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the wiring is locked to the fixed base and the second movable base, and is bent from the fixed base by the first movable base to extend to the second movable base. Since wiring is performed, when the first movable base and the second movable base move to a relatively extended position and a relatively contracted position, the wiring moves to the first movable base and the second movable base. It is possible to smoothly move the wiring while preventing the floating.

  In addition, the first gear and the second gear are installed on one side with the extending direction central axis of the first movable base, and the wiring is on the other side of the extending direction central axis of the first movable base. Therefore, the first movable base and the second movable base are relatively contracted with the relatively extended positions while preventing the wiring from interfering with the first gear and the second gear. Can be moved to a position. Thereby, wiring can be moved more effectively and smoothly.

  Further, when the movable accessory is in the standby position, the wiring is folded and accommodated between the fixed base and the first movable base and between the first movable base and the second movable base, and the protrusion is projected. Since the wire is bent by being pressed against the shape portion, the wiring accommodated by being bent by the plurality of main body members can be further bent by the protrusion portion.

  As a result, the length of the wiring accommodated between the plurality of main body members can be increased to reduce the gap between the main body member and the wiring, and the wiring can be prevented from flapping inside the main body member. Can be accommodated stably.

  Further, by further bending the wiring by the protruding portion, it is possible to generate a restoring force that extends straight from the state where the wiring is bent. For this reason, the frictional force between the wiring and the main body member can be increased to more effectively prevent the wiring from flapping inside the main body member, and the wiring can be more stably accommodated in the main body member.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in the patent document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-79356), the game balls won from a plurality of game medium winning holes are merged in one ball passage and discharged to the discharge port. When the number of game balls passing through the ball passage per unit time is increased in order to reduce the game speed, there is a high possibility that the game balls won from the game medium winning entrance come into contact at the junction of the ball passages. For this reason, it is assumed that a game ball is clogged in the ball passage, and there is a high possibility that the game is interrupted.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first game medium winning port (general winning port 40A) into which game media can be won, and at least one or more second game medium winning ports (general winning ports through which game media can be won). 40B, 40C), a first game medium passage (ball passage 208) for discharging the game medium won in the first game medium winning opening downstream, and a game won in the second game medium prize opening. A gaming machine including at least one or more second game medium passages (ball passages 209, 210) for discharging the medium downstream, wherein the second game medium passage is the second game medium prize. A structure in which the passage area, which is a cross-sectional area perpendicular to the direction in which the game medium passes, is larger than the passage area of the first game medium passage, is merged with the first game medium passage downstream of the mouth. Have.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the second game medium passage merges with the first game medium passage downstream of the second game medium winning opening, and the area of the passage is the first game medium passage. For example, even if the number of game media passing through the game media passage per unit time is increased in order to reduce the game speed, the first game media winning opening and the It is possible to prevent the gaming media won from the second gaming media winning slot from being clogged downstream of the second gaming media winning slot. As a result, the game medium can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and the game performance can be improved.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that a width in the front-rear direction of the second game medium passage is larger than a width in the front-rear direction of the first game medium passage.

  In this way, for example, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage in the vertical direction of the game board from increasing, a prize is won from the first game medium prize opening and the second game medium prize opening. It is possible to prevent the gaming media from being jammed downstream of the second gaming media winning opening.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the vertical width of the second game medium passage is larger than the vertical width of the first game medium passage.

  In this way, for example, while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium path from extending in the front-rear direction of the game board, it is possible to win from the first game medium winning port and the second game medium winning port. It is possible to prevent the gaming media from being jammed downstream of the second gaming media winning opening.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that a width in the front-rear direction of the second game medium passage is larger than a width in the front-rear direction of the first game medium passage.

  In this way, the game won from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage from increasing in the vertical direction of the game board. It is possible to prevent the medium from being jammed downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is preferable that the vertical width of the second game medium passage is larger than the vertical width of the first game medium passage.

  In this way, the game won from the first game medium winning opening and the second game medium winning opening while preventing the area occupied by the second game medium passage in the front-rear direction of the game board from increasing. It is possible to prevent the medium from being jammed downstream of the second game medium winning opening.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first winning port (first big winning port 254) through which a game medium can be won and at least one second winning port (second through which a game medium can be won). A grand prize opening 255), a first game medium passage (ball passage 263) for discharging the game medium won in the first winning opening, and at least discharging the game medium won in the second winning opening. A gaming machine including one or more second game medium passages (ball passages 259), wherein the second game medium passages are downstream of the second prize opening and the first game medium passages. And a passage area which is a cross-sectional area perpendicular to the direction in which the game medium passes is formed larger than a passage area of the first game medium path, and the first game medium path In addition to the merging portion, a communication portion (in communication with the first game medium passage ( Has a passage 264), the first game media prize to the winning port also has a discharge configurable in the second game medium passage through the communicating portion.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the second game medium passage is merged with the first game medium passage downstream of the second prize opening, and has a cross section perpendicular to the direction in which the game medium passes. A passage area, which is an area, is formed larger than a passage area of the first game medium passage, and communicates with the first game medium passage separately from a joining portion with the first game medium passage. It has a communication part. In addition, since the game medium won in the first prize opening can be discharged to the first game medium passage via the communication portion, the game medium won from the first prize opening is jammed downstream. Can be prevented. As a result, the game medium can be smoothly discharged toward the downstream, and the game performance can be improved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device 32 1st starting port (winning port, 1st winning port))
33 2nd start opening 36 1st grand prize opening 36A 1st big prize opening shutter 37 2nd big prize opening 37 2nd big prize opening shutter 38A Specific area 38B Non-specific area 39, 39 'Displacement member 40A General winning opening (first 2 prize opening, 1st game media prize opening)
40B General prize opening (2nd prize opening, 2nd game media prize opening)
40C General prize opening (2nd prize opening, 2nd game media prize opening)
61 Main CPU
71 Sub CPU
73 Work RAM
83 Dispensing device 99 Decoration member 101A Upper movable production member (movable accessory)
101B Lower movable production member (movable accessory)
106 Movable body (first movable body)
107 Movable body (second movable body)
108 Movable body (third movable body)
109 Movable member 110A Motor (drive member)
112 Arm member (interlocking part)
114 Rotating body (Rotating member)
114A fitting protrusion (first fitting portion)
114B slit 115A fitting protrusion (second fitting portion)
115 Slider member (movable part)
117, 117A Outer ring member (movable part)
121 Gap 160 Front decoration (lens member)
160a, 181a, 182a, 183a, 184a, 195a LED (light emitting unit, first light emitting unit)
161 Case (main body member)
162 Fixed base (fixed base)
162A Rack (first rack, moving mechanism) 162a Rack teeth (first uneven portion)
163 Rear movable base (main body member, first movable base)
163D engagement protrusion (first engagement portion)
163v, 163w guide surface (first guide part)
164v, 164w guide surface (second guide part)
163x, 163y Lower stopper (protrusion)
164 Front movable base (main body member, second movable base)
164A Protrusion (second rack, moving mechanism)
164a Rack teeth (second irregularities)
165 blade movable rack (third movable base)
165G engagement protrusion (second engagement portion)
169A gear (first gear, moving mechanism)
169B to 169E Gear (second gear, moving mechanism)
171 Coil spring (biasing member)
172 Upper left wing member 172 (movable member)
173 Upper right wing member (movable member)
174 Lower left wing member (movable member)
175 Lower right wing member (movable member)
185 Relay board (wiring board)
186 Flexible cable (wiring)
187 Guide groove (first groove)
188 Guide groove (second groove)
190,191 Guide protrusion (protrusion)
190a, 191a Inclined surface 197A, 197B Magnet (adsorption member)
198 Projection 203 Ball path (Upstream game medium path, game medium path)
204 Ball passage (upstream game medium passage, first passage, game medium passage)
202 First start port member (winning port unit)
205 Ball passage unit (game medium passage)
206 Ball path (downstream game medium path, first path, game medium path)
208 ball passage (first game medium passage)
209 Ball passage (second game media passage)
210 Ball passage (second game medium passage)
212 Ball passage (second passage)
214 Magnetic sensor (Magnetic detection sensor)
215 Lighting board 216 Cable (wiring)
217 Protrusion (support)
219 Semi-cylindrical member (coating member)
254 1st prize opening (1st prize opening)
255 2nd prize opening (2nd prize opening)
259 ball passage (second game medium passage)
263 Ball passage (first game medium passage)
H.264 ball passage (communication part)
291 LED (second light emitting unit)
320 First start port switch (first sensor, game medium detecting member)
400A General winning opening left switch (second sensor)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine including a movable accessory movable to execute a predetermined movable effect by moving to a standby position and a movable position,
The movable accessory is
A first movable body movable in one direction and the other direction by rotation of the drive member;
A second movable body having a pressing portion and movably provided in the first movable body, and movable in the one direction and the other direction together with the first movable body;
A third movable body movable in the other direction together with the second movable body;
An interlocking portion having a guide hole and swingably provided on the first movable body, and capable of being pressed by the pressing portion;
A rotating member that has a first fitting portion and a plurality of slits that fit into the interlocking portion and that is rotatably provided on the third movable body,
A movable member having a second fitting portion that fits into the plurality of slits and having a movable portion that is movable at least in a radial direction of the rotating member by rotation of the rotating member;
In a state where the movable accessory is located at the standby position, by rotating the drive member forward from an initial position, the first movable body and the second movable body are moved in the one direction and the interlocking is performed. Oscillating part is converted into rotation in one direction of the rotating member, the movable part is moved at least in the radial direction while only allowing rotation of the rotating member,
By rotating the driving member in the reverse direction from the initial position, the first movable body is moved in the other direction to convert the swing of the interlocking portion into the rotation of the rotating member in the one direction. 3. A game machine, wherein the movable body is moved in the other direction to move the movable accessory to the movable position, and the movable portion is moved at least in the radial direction.

Images